1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
124 \notefontcolor #0000ff
128 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
133 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
141 \paragraph_separation skip
144 \math_numbering_side default
145 \quotes_style english
149 \paperpagestyle default
151 \tracking_changes true
152 \output_changes false
154 \postpone_fragile_content false
158 \docbook_table_output 0
159 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
160 \author -1162675398 "Tobias Hilbricht" hilbricht@linopus.de
161 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
162 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
174 by the \SpecialChar LyX
179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
181 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation,
182 please send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
183 Documentation mailing list:
185 \begin_inset CommandInset href
187 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
199 \begin_inset Newline newline
203 \begin_inset Newline newline
207 \begin_inset Note Note
210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
211 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
212 \begin_inset Newline newline
217 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
225 \begin_layout Standard
226 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
227 LatexCommand tableofcontents
234 \begin_layout Chapter
238 \begin_layout Section
239 What is \SpecialChar LyX
243 \begin_layout Standard
245 is a document preparation system.
246 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
249 business letters and proposals,
251 It is unlike most other
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
259 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core editing style.
260 That means that when you type a section header,
262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
276 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
291 takes care of the typesetting for you;
292 so you deal only with concepts,
296 \begin_layout Standard
297 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
302 If you haven't read it yet,
308 \begin_layout Standard
313 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
316 the format of all of the manuals.
317 If you don't read it,
318 you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
319 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
322 \begin_layout Section
327 \begin_layout Standard
328 Like most applications,
330 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its window.
331 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
332 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical scrollbar.
335 \begin_layout Standard
336 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
337 This is not a bug or an oversight,
339 When you read a book,
340 you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the next line.
341 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion,
342 hence the need for only a vertical scrollbar.
345 \begin_layout Standard
346 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
347 The first case is large images.
348 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen,
349 left click on the image and use the option
360 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than the \SpecialChar LyX
362 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
367 menus and toolbar buttons,
368 have a look at Appendix
373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
375 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
383 \begin_layout Section
387 \begin_layout Standard
388 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
390 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
392 Just select the manual you want to read from the
399 \begin_layout Section
400 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
404 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
411 \begin_layout Standard
412 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
413 can be configured via the menu
415 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
419 \begin_inset Index idx
424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
431 is able to inspect your system to see what programs,
434 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
435 packages are available.
436 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences settings.
437 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
438 was installed on your system,
439 you might have some items that you installed locally,
441 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
445 \begin_inset space \space{}
448 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
450 which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
452 To force \SpecialChar LyX
453 to re-inspect your system use
455 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
459 \begin_inset Index idx
464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
465 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
471 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
472 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
475 \begin_layout Section
478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
480 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
487 \begin_layout Standard
488 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
489 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
490 installed but you will not be able to create PDFs.
491 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
492 every \SpecialChar LyX
493 document can still be output as plain text,
494 as Docbook or as XHTML.
497 \begin_layout Standard
498 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
500 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required files installed,
501 but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
504 \begin_layout Standard
505 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
506 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
507 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view from the menu
509 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
517 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
520 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
524 \begin_inset Index idx
529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
530 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
538 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
545 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
549 \begin_layout Chapter
550 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
554 \begin_layout Section
555 Basic File Operations
556 \begin_inset Index idx
561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
570 \begin_layout Standard
575 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word processor as well as some more advanced operations:
578 \begin_layout Itemize
601 \begin_layout Itemize
618 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
624 \begin_layout Itemize
647 \begin_layout Itemize
657 \begin_layout Itemize
667 \begin_layout Itemize
682 \begin_layout Itemize
688 \begin_layout Itemize
711 \begin_layout Itemize
724 arg "buffer-write-as"
730 \begin_layout Itemize
744 \begin_layout Itemize
750 \begin_layout Itemize
764 \begin_layout Itemize
779 \begin_layout Standard
780 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors,
781 with a few minor differences.
784 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
795 command lists the available templates.
796 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features and possibly propose text fragments for the document,
797 features and text you would otherwise need to set or enter manually.
798 They can be of use for certain classes,
799 especially those for writing letters (see section
804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
806 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
812 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a \SpecialChar LyX
815 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
821 \begin_layout Standard
822 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
855 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
856 to open a file or create a new one,
857 that big blank space on the screen is just that —
866 \begin_layout Standard
887 are useful if multiple people work on the same document at the same time.
891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
892 If you plan to do this,
893 you should check out the Version Control feature in \SpecialChar LyX
896 \begin_inset Flex Emph
899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
900 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
907 \begin_inset Flex Emph
910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
916 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
934 will reload the document from disk.
935 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document and want to restore it to the last saved version.
944 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify them as your changes.
947 \begin_layout Section
948 \begin_inset CommandInset label
950 name "sec:Safety-Nets"
955 Rescuing Files If Things Go Awry
958 \begin_layout Standard
960 lays much stress on safety.
961 We know how much effort you invest in your work,
962 and thus the last thing we want is that this work gets lost.
964 we cannot completely prevent bad things from happening:
966 might crash (although we put in all effort that it doesn't),
967 you might face a power outage while you are working on a document with unsaved changes,
968 disks might get corrupt or files might get lost or damaged during synchronization or simply because you deleted it by mistake.
971 provides a multi-layered safety net that will hopefully prevent you from major hassles.
972 This means that \SpecialChar LyX
973 does not simply make a backup file,
974 it makes several such files that might be useful in different scenarios.
975 Parts of this multi-layered net can be switched off,
976 if you prefer to go a bit more risky over having multiple files (see section
981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
983 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
988 but all measures are on by default to provide you with most possible security.
991 \begin_layout Standard
993 we elaborate on the diverse files and when they might become useful.
996 \begin_layout Subsection
1000 \begin_layout Standard
1003 makes backup copies of files when they are saved.
1005 these files are stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same file name but the extension
1010 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1019 If you prefer to have all backups in a central place (and maybe on a separate disk),
1024 in preferences (see section
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1031 reference "sec:Paths"
1040 then all backups are stored there.
1041 In order to prevent file name clashes,
1042 the files then do not simply have the original file name,
1043 but also the path in their name,
1045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1059 !home!paula!work!myfile.lyx~
1064 \begin_layout Standard
1065 Note that some file managers hide backup files by default,
1066 and you need to enable
1067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1074 in order to see them.
1077 \begin_layout Standard
1078 Backup files provide the latest saved version of a document.
1079 They are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1081 but overwritten if new changes are saved in the original file.
1084 \begin_layout Subsection
1088 \begin_layout Standard
1091 also makes automatic snapshots of all opened documents that have unsaved changes in a regular time interval (which can be adjusted in preferences,
1093 \begin_inset space ~
1097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1099 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
1104 As opposed to the backup files,
1105 these also contain unsaved changes and thus might be newer than the backups.
1108 \begin_layout Standard
1109 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name,
1111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1119 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1128 Auto-save snapshots are deleted when a document is closed normally,
1130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1134 with all changes saved.
1135 They are left on disk in case of non-normal termination (e.
1136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1140 program crash or power outage),
1141 and this is when they might become useful.
1144 \begin_layout Subsection
1148 \begin_layout Standard
1150 crashes and documents have unsaved changes,
1151 the program furthermore tries to write an emergency file,
1152 which is a version of the document containing all unsaved changes,
1153 even those that have been made after the latest snapshot.
1156 \begin_layout Standard
1157 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name but the extension
1162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1168 myfile.lyx.emergency
1171 When the respective document is reopened with \SpecialChar LyX
1173 the application recognizes the emergency file and asks you whether it should try to recover your file to that last state.
1176 and if this succeeds it will ask you next whether the emergency file can be deleted.
1177 Agree on this only after you checked that everything has been correctly recovered!
1180 \begin_layout Subsection
1181 Backup Files from Old \SpecialChar LyX
1185 \begin_layout Standard
1186 If you open a \SpecialChar LyX
1187 document for the first time with a new major version of \SpecialChar LyX
1189 it gets converted to the new file format (allowing for new features).
1192 keeps a copy of the old version,
1195 <filename>-lyxformat-<n>.lyx
1198 where <n> is the old format (e.
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1205 myfile-lyxformat-474.lyx
1208 Those files are stored at the same location than the backup files,
1209 that is alongside the original document or,
1211 in the backup directory.
1214 \begin_layout Standard
1215 As with backup files,
1216 these files are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1220 \begin_layout Subsection
1221 When to Use Which File?
1224 \begin_layout Standard
1225 Now why all these files?
1226 Because they have different purposes.
1230 \begin_layout Standard
1232 terminates unexpectedly,
1235 \begin_layout Enumerate
1236 first try to restore from the emergency file (by reopening the document in \SpecialChar LyX
1238 This file has the latest changes,
1239 even changes you made after the last auto-save snapshot has been made.
1242 \begin_layout Enumerate
1243 If the rescue file way did not work because there is no rescue file (e.
1244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1248 after a power outage) or the rescue file is damaged (it might happen in mean cases that the rescue files contains just that latest addition that makes \SpecialChar LyX
1250 look if there is an auto-save snapshot.
1252 remove the trailing # so that the file can be opened with \SpecialChar LyX
1253 (not the first # in order to keep the original file until you checked the snapshot) and see if that works for you.
1255 you will have lost five minutes of work in the worst case (with the default settings at least).
1258 \begin_layout Enumerate
1259 If there is no auto-save snapshot or this one is garbled as well,
1260 use the backup file.
1261 It does not have all the unsaved changes,
1262 but it might still be the most recent you can get.
1263 This is particularly the case if the original file itself got lost or is damaged.
1266 \begin_layout Standard
1267 The fourth type of file,
1268 the backup file from old versions,
1269 is useful if the conversion process did not work and results in a non-working document (although we put in all efforts to prevent this) or if you mistakenly opened and saved a document with a newer version (such as a development version) and actually want to keep on using the old version.
1272 \begin_layout Standard
1273 So much for the safety net.
1274 We hope you will not need it,
1276 that it catches you as high up as possible.
1277 Now let us return to the actual writing process.
1280 \begin_layout Section
1281 Basic Editing Features
1282 \begin_inset Index idx
1287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1294 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1296 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1303 \begin_layout Standard
1304 Like most modern word processors,
1306 can perform cut and paste operations on blocks of text,
1307 can move by character,
1310 and can delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1311 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1312 editing features and how to access them.
1313 We will start with cut and paste.
1316 \begin_layout Standard
1317 As you might expect,
1322 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands,
1323 along with various other editing features.
1324 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1328 \begin_layout Itemize
1334 \begin_inset Index idx
1339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1369 \begin_layout Itemize
1375 \begin_inset Index idx
1380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1410 \begin_layout Itemize
1416 \begin_inset Index idx
1421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1447 \begin_layout Itemize
1451 \begin_inset space ~
1457 \begin_layout Itemize
1461 \begin_inset space ~
1467 \begin_layout Itemize
1471 \begin_inset space ~
1475 \begin_inset space ~
1481 \begin_inset Index idx
1486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1495 \begin_inset Index idx
1500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1516 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1526 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1532 \begin_layout Standard
1533 The first three are self-explanatory.
1534 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1535 and other programs using
1557 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted) so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1562 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1563 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1564 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table,
1565 the text will be pasted into individual cells.
1569 \begin_inset space ~
1574 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1575 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list entry.
1578 \begin_layout Standard
1582 \begin_inset space ~
1587 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard contents.
1588 Possible formats include HTML,
1593 \begin_inset space ~
1600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1609 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1611 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1615 \begin_inset space \space{}
1618 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short text which is often meaningless.)
1621 \begin_layout Standard
1625 \begin_inset space ~
1628 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1630 \begin_inset space ~
1634 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1638 \begin_inset space ~
1647 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1648 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection is inserted as one paragraph.
1649 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1653 \begin_inset space ~
1659 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1660 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1665 \begin_inset space ~
1668 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1674 \begin_inset space ~
1682 \begin_inset space ~
1685 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1688 paste from the primary selection.
1689 This is normally the currently selected text.
1692 \begin_layout Standard
1695 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1697 \begin_inset space ~
1701 \begin_inset space ~
1709 \begin_inset space ~
1713 \begin_inset space ~
1719 Once you have found a word or expression,
1725 \begin_inset space ~
1740 shortcut) to skip the currently selected word,
1744 \begin_inset space ~
1756 arg "word-find-backward"
1759 shortcut) to search backwards.
1760 Even if you close the widget,
1770 arg "word-find-backward"
1773 will search further.
1776 \begin_layout Standard
1781 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1784 \begin_inset space ~
1789 field and searches the next match.
1793 \begin_inset space ~
1798 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1801 \begin_layout Standard
1803 the following options are available:
1806 \begin_layout Itemize
1811 \begin_inset space ~
1816 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
1817 If the toggle is set,
1819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1830 will not match the word
1831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1846 \begin_layout Itemize
1852 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1853 to only find complete words,
1855 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1887 \begin_layout Itemize
1893 will limit search and replace,
1895 to the current cursor selection.
1898 \begin_layout Itemize
1904 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input,
1905 without pressing the
1908 \begin_inset space ~
1916 \begin_layout Itemize
1921 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has been reached without asking.
1922 If this is not checked,
1923 a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
1924 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
1925 so you need to put it back manually.
1928 \begin_layout Standard
1929 \paragraph_spacing single
1930 The widget also has a
1934 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search widget),
1935 hiding replace and options.
1941 button brings you back to the full size.
1944 \begin_layout Standard
1945 \paragraph_spacing single
1948 also offers an advanced
1951 \begin_inset space ~
1955 \begin_inset space ~
1960 feature that is described in section
1961 \begin_inset space ~
1965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1967 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1975 \begin_layout Standard
1979 \begin_inset space \space{}
1983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1991 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
1992 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an inset and pressing
1996 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
2003 \begin_layout Standard
2007 arg "inset-select-all"
2010 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
2011 When the cursor is inside an inset
2014 arg "inset-select-all"
2017 selects the content of the inset.
2021 arg "inset-select-all"
2024 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and then to the whole document.
2028 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
2031 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end of the document.
2034 \begin_layout Section
2036 \begin_inset Index idx
2041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2048 \begin_inset Index idx
2053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2062 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
2069 \begin_layout Standard
2070 If you make a mistake,
2071 you can easily recover from it.
2073 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
2076 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2079 or the toolbar button
2086 If you accidentally undo too much,
2089 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2092 or the toolbar button
2099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2106 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
2107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2110 steps to minimize memory overhead.
2113 \begin_layout Standard
2122 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
2124 However they will not undo or redo text character by character,
2125 but by blocks of text.
2128 \begin_layout Section
2130 \begin_inset Index idx
2135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2144 \begin_layout Standard
2145 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2148 \begin_layout Enumerate
2153 \begin_layout Itemize
2158 once anywhere in the edit window.
2159 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2163 \begin_layout Enumerate
2168 \begin_layout Itemize
2175 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2178 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2181 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2182 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2183 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected text.
2186 \begin_layout Itemize
2187 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2190 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2197 \begin_layout Enumerate
2205 \begin_layout Standard
2206 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2207 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2211 \begin_layout Section
2213 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2215 name "sec:Navigating"
2220 \begin_inset Index idx
2225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2234 \begin_layout Standard
2236 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2239 \begin_layout Itemize
2244 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2247 \begin_layout Itemize
2249 which is accessed either by the menu
2251 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2253 \begin_inset space ~
2258 or by the toolbar button
2261 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2267 \begin_layout Itemize
2268 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2270 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2273 and use the same menu to return to them.
2274 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2277 \begin_layout Standard
2281 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2286 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2287 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2289 \begin_inset space ~
2294 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2295 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your last editing position.
2298 \begin_layout Standard
2303 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2307 \begin_layout Subsection
2309 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2311 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2316 \begin_inset Index idx
2321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2323 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2338 \begin_inset Index idx
2343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2352 \begin_layout Standard
2353 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists of tables and figures,
2355 labels and cross-references (see section
2356 \begin_inset space ~
2360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2362 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2369 or citations (see section
2370 \begin_inset space ~
2374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2376 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2382 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your document.
2385 \begin_layout Standard
2386 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2387 For example with citations,
2388 the context menu allows you to open the citation dialog and to modify the citation.
2391 \begin_layout Standard
2396 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2398 if you are displaying the list of
2400 Labels and References
2402 and wish to see only references to subsections,
2403 you can enter the text
2404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2411 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2414 \begin_layout Standard
2415 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further control the display.
2420 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2421 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2426 option keeps it in the current view state.
2427 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2428 \begin_inset space ~
2431 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2432 \begin_inset space ~
2436 the subsections of sections
2437 \begin_inset space ~
2440 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2445 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2446 \begin_inset space ~
2451 the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2460 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2463 \begin_layout Standard
2470 button refreshes the TOC (useful while editing if you have changed sections in the document).
2471 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections in your document.
2484 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2486 you can move section
2487 \begin_inset space ~
2491 \begin_inset space ~
2494 2.4 or after section
2495 \begin_inset space ~
2500 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2513 (or the corresponding key bindings
2521 ) you can change the level of sections.
2522 You can make section
2523 \begin_inset space ~
2527 \begin_inset space ~
2531 \begin_inset space ~
2537 \begin_layout Standard
2538 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole section to copy,
2542 \begin_layout Subsection
2543 Horizontal Scrolling
2544 \begin_inset Index idx
2549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2551 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2561 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2578 \begin_layout Standard
2580 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats such as ISO
2581 \begin_inset space ~
2584 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2585 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2589 \begin_layout Standard
2590 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2594 \begin_layout Itemize
2596 is used on a small tablet computer
2599 \begin_layout Itemize
2600 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2612 \begin_inset space ~
2625 \begin_layout Itemize
2626 Math constructs with long command names
2629 \begin_layout Standard
2630 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2631 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor is moved.
2632 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2633 window so that table
2634 \begin_inset space ~
2638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2640 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2646 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the table.
2647 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2650 \begin_layout Standard
2651 \begin_inset Float table
2658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2659 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2662 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2664 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2668 Horizontal scrolling test.
2676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2678 \begin_inset Tabular
2679 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2680 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2681 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2682 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2683 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2725 \begin_layout Section
2726 Input/Word Completion
2727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2729 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2734 \begin_inset Index idx
2739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2746 \begin_inset Index idx
2751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2782 \begin_layout Standard
2784 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently opened.
2785 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that is used to propose completions.
2788 \begin_layout Standard
2789 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2792 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2797 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2804 \begin_inset space ~
2808 \begin_inset space ~
2813 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2817 \begin_inset space ~
2822 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2823 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2826 \begin_inset space ~
2832 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and popup completion,
2833 you can set the minimal number of characters a word must have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
2836 \begin_layout Standard
2838 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are completions available.
2843 key to accept a proposed completion.
2844 If several completions are possible,
2845 a popup is opened showing them.
2846 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2853 \begin_layout Standard
2854 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the corresponding options for text.
2856 the special math option
2860 enables characters to be composed.
2862 if you want to insert the character
2863 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2867 you can input the characters
2868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2879 in a formula to create it.
2880 This is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the math toolbar.
2881 A list of supported character combinations can be found in the file
2885 located in \SpecialChar LyX
2886 's installation folder.
2891 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2892 In the example above,
2898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2929 \begin_layout Section
2931 \begin_inset Index idx
2936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2943 \begin_inset Index idx
2948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2950 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
2953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2965 \begin_inset Index idx
2970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2972 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
2975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2989 \begin_layout Standard
2990 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
3006 which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3009 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3013 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3014 \begin_inset space ~
3018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3020 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3028 \begin_layout Standard
3033 \begin_inset space ~
3042 \begin_inset space ~
3067 do exactly what you expect them to do.
3071 \begin_layout Labeling
3072 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3076 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3077 LatexCommand nomenclature
3079 description "Tabulator key"
3086 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3088 If you do not understand this,
3090 \begin_inset space ~
3094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3096 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3104 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3111 \begin_inset space ~
3115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3117 reference "subsec:Lists"
3126 If you are still confused,
3132 \begin_inset Newline newline
3140 key is only used to accept proposed input completions,
3141 to move the cursor in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or Enumerate.
3144 \begin_layout Labeling
3145 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3149 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3150 LatexCommand nomenclature
3152 description "Escape key"
3160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3169 to cancel operations.
3170 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3173 \begin_layout Labeling
3174 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3179 These move the cursor,
3181 to the beginning and end of a line,
3182 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning or end of the file.
3185 \begin_layout Standard
3186 There are three modifier keys:
3189 \begin_layout Labeling
3190 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3208 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3209 LatexCommand nomenclature
3211 description "Control key"
3216 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending on which keys it is used in combination with:
3220 \begin_layout Itemize
3230 it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3233 \begin_layout Itemize
3243 it moves by words instead of characters.
3246 \begin_layout Itemize
3256 it moves to the beginning and the end of the document,
3261 \begin_layout Labeling
3262 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3280 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3281 LatexCommand nomenclature
3283 description "Shift key"
3288 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3291 \begin_layout Labeling
3292 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3310 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3311 LatexCommand nomenclature
3313 description "Alt or Meta key"
3318 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards,
3319 unless your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3320 If you have both keys,
3321 you will need to try out which one actually performs the
3326 \begin_inset Newline newline
3329 This key does many different things,
3330 but it also activates the
3332 menu accelerator keys
3335 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a menu or menu item,
3336 it selects that menu item.
3340 \begin_layout Standard
3343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3349 \begin_inset space ~
3353 \begin_inset space ~
3359 \begin_inset space ~
3367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3386 \begin_inset space ~
3392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3402 \begin_layout Standard
3407 manual lists all other things bound to the
3415 \begin_layout Standard
3416 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3417 because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
3418 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered and any existing key bindings for that action.
3420 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3421 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding it.
3422 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned,
3424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3439 followed by a capital
3446 \begin_layout Chapter
3449 \begin_inset Index idx
3454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3457 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3474 \begin_layout Section
3476 \begin_inset Index idx
3481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3483 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3500 \begin_layout Subsection
3504 \begin_layout Standard
3505 Before you do anything else,
3506 before you ever start writing a document,
3507 you need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3508 Different types of documents use different types of spacing,
3513 different documents use different paragraph environments,
3514 and format the title of your document differently.
3517 \begin_layout Standard
3522 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3523 By setting the document class,
3524 you automatically select these properties,
3525 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3526 If you don't choose a document class,
3528 picks one for you by default.
3529 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3532 \begin_layout Subsection
3534 \begin_inset Index idx
3539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3541 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3556 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3558 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3565 \begin_layout Standard
3566 You can select a class using the
3568 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3569 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3573 \begin_inset Index idx
3578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3580 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3595 Select the class you want to use,
3596 and make any fine tunings of the options you may need.
3599 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3603 \begin_layout Standard
3604 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3609 \begin_layout Description
3610 Article for basic articles
3613 \begin_layout Description
3614 Report for basic reports
3617 \begin_layout Description
3618 Book for writing a book
3621 \begin_layout Description
3622 Letter for US-style letters
3625 \begin_layout Standard
3626 There are also some non-standard classes,
3627 which \SpecialChar LyX
3628 only uses if you have installed the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3630 though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3631 distributions will include many of these.
3632 Here are some of the classes.
3633 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3635 Special Document Classes
3644 \begin_layout Description
3645 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3648 \begin_layout Description
3649 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry Society
3652 \begin_layout Description
3653 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical Union
3656 \begin_layout Description
3657 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
3658 There are three article layouts available.
3659 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc.,
3660 that prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3661 All result-type statements (propositions,
3663 and so on) are sequenced together,
3666 and the like have their own sequence.
3668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3671 sequential numbering
3672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3675 scheme does not place the section number with each result,
3676 but numbers them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3677 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3678 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3681 \begin_layout Description
3682 Beamer Layout for presentations
3685 \begin_layout Description
3686 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3687 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3689 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
3693 \begin_layout Description
3694 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3697 \begin_layout Description
3699 \begin_inset space ~
3702 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3705 \begin_layout Description
3706 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3709 \begin_layout Description
3710 Foils Used to make transparencies
3713 \begin_layout Description
3714 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3715 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3717 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
3721 \begin_layout Description
3722 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3725 \begin_layout Description
3726 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3729 \begin_layout Description
3730 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3733 \begin_layout Description
3734 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes,
3735 offers many useful features like caption formatting,
3736 automatic print space calculation etc.
3737 (Is used by this document.)
3740 \begin_layout Description
3741 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3744 \begin_layout Description
3745 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3748 \begin_layout Description
3753 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical Society (APS),
3754 American Institute of Physics (AIP),
3755 and Optical Society of America (OSA).
3756 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3760 \begin_layout Description
3761 Slides Used to make transparencies
3764 \begin_layout Description
3766 \begin_inset space ~
3769 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3772 \begin_layout Description
3773 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3776 \begin_layout Standard
3777 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes here.
3778 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3780 Special Document Classes
3788 we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all of the document classes.
3791 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3795 \begin_layout Standard
3796 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3798 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3799 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3803 \begin_inset Index idx
3808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3810 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3833 If you open a document that uses such a class,
3834 you will receive a warning saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are not installed.
3835 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3838 \begin_layout Standard
3841 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
3848 are highly specialized.
3850 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
3851 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files,
3852 with a growing number.
3853 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3854 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed by some document class.
3855 There are just too many of them.
3856 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3859 \begin_layout Standard
3860 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3869 you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3870 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that document class for a new file.
3872 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3875 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3882 manual for information on how to install them.
3883 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3889 \begin_layout Standard
3890 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3891 provides support for many different sorts of documents,
3892 it does not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3894 many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3895 class files to be used for dissertations submitted to those universities.
3896 The \SpecialChar LyX
3897 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3900 users can write their own layout files,
3901 and many users have done so.
3904 Installing New Document Classes,
3912 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3915 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3917 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3919 name "subsec:Modules"
3924 \begin_inset Index idx
3929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3931 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3948 \begin_layout Standard
3949 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the chosen document class.
3950 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3951 This is not available in any document class,
3952 so you have to load the corresponding module in the
3958 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3962 \begin_inset Index idx
3967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3969 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3984 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what it does.
3987 \begin_layout Standard
3988 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3989 packages or file format converters that are not always installed by default.
3991 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter,
3992 and it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3993 You can still use the module while editing your file,
3994 but you will not be able to export to PDF or print your document,
3995 since \SpecialChar LyX
3996 will not be able to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3997 file without the missing prerequisites.
3998 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output,
3999 then you need to install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
4002 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
4006 \begin_inset Index idx
4011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4012 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
4031 manual for more information on installing required packages.
4034 \begin_layout Standard
4035 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4044 Some modules require other modules,
4045 and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
4047 will advise you about these things.
4055 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4059 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
4064 \begin_inset Index idx
4069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4071 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4088 \begin_layout Standard
4089 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
4090 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
4092 They are intended to be used in a variety of different documents.
4093 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different documents,
4094 you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
4097 a particular document has very special needs,
4098 but you need a specific inset or text style only that one time.
4099 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
4101 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
4103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4119 manual for information on how to use it.
4122 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4126 \begin_layout Standard
4127 Each class has a default set of options.
4128 Here's a quick table describing them:
4131 \begin_layout Standard
4132 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4138 \begin_layout Standard
4140 \begin_inset Tabular
4141 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4142 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4143 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4144 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4145 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4146 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4147 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4601 \begin_layout Standard
4602 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4608 \begin_layout Standard
4609 You're probably also wondering what
4610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4614 \begin_inset space ~
4618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4622 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4623 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4629 the rest do not and begin instead with the
4634 Some document classes,
4635 such as the ones for letters,
4636 don't use any section headings.
4657 We will describe these headings fully in section
4658 \begin_inset space ~
4662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4664 reference "subsec:Headings"
4672 \begin_layout Subsection
4674 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4676 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4681 \begin_inset Index idx
4686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4688 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4703 \begin_inset Index idx
4708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4710 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4727 \begin_layout Standard
4728 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4730 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4737 \begin_inset space ~
4745 \begin_inset space ~
4751 you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated list.
4752 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4753 doesn't support special options you want to use for your document.
4754 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4755 -class and its options,
4756 you have to read its manual.
4759 \begin_layout Standard
4763 \begin_inset space ~
4770 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4776 \begin_inset space ~
4781 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4782 You can choose between the following five options:
4785 \begin_layout Labeling
4786 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4791 Use default page style of current class.
4794 \begin_layout Labeling
4795 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4800 No page numbers or headings.
4803 \begin_layout Labeling
4804 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4812 \begin_layout Labeling
4813 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4818 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4819 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4820 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the maximum sectioning level of the class.
4823 \begin_layout Labeling
4824 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4829 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4835 \begin_inset Index idx
4840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4843 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4858 How they are defined is explained in section
4859 \begin_inset space ~
4863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4865 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4873 \begin_layout Standard
4874 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4875 \begin_inset space ~
4879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4881 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4889 \begin_layout Subsection
4890 Paper Size and Orientation
4891 \begin_inset Index idx
4896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4898 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4915 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4922 \begin_layout Standard
4923 You can find the following options in the menu
4926 \begin_inset space ~
4933 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4937 \begin_inset Index idx
4942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4944 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4961 \begin_layout Labeling
4962 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4966 \begin_inset space ~
4971 What size paper to print on.
4976 \begin_layout Itemize
4982 \begin_layout Itemize
4988 \begin_layout Itemize
4994 \begin_layout Itemize
5000 \begin_layout Itemize
5008 \begin_layout Itemize
5014 \begin_layout Itemize
5021 \begin_layout Labeling
5022 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5027 To choose whether to output as
5038 \begin_layout Labeling
5039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5043 \begin_inset space ~
5048 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
5049 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
5052 \begin_layout Subsection
5054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5056 name "subsec:Margins"
5061 \begin_inset Index idx
5066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5068 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5083 \begin_inset Index idx
5088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5097 \begin_layout Standard
5098 Paper margins are set in the menu
5100 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5104 \begin_inset Index idx
5109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5111 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5128 \begin_layout Standard
5129 If you use a KOMA-Script document class,
5130 you can use the default settings because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking the paper format and the font size into account.
5133 \begin_layout Subsection
5137 \begin_layout Standard
5138 If you change a document class,
5140 has to convert everything into the new class.
5141 That includes the paragraph environments.
5142 Some paragraph environments are standard,
5143 in so far as all of the document classes have them;
5144 but some classes have special paragraph environments.
5145 If this is the case,
5146 and you change the document class,
5148 will mark the paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
5149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5157 The name of the style is retained,
5158 in case you should want to go back to the old class.
5159 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting,
5160 so you will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraphs manually to a style present in your new document class.
5163 \begin_layout Section
5164 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
5165 \begin_inset Index idx
5170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5172 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5189 \begin_layout Subsection
5191 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5193 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
5200 \begin_layout Standard
5201 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments,
5202 we'd like to say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
5205 \begin_layout Standard
5206 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5207 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5208 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5209 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5213 paragraph of a section,
5224 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5225 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document language than English.
5227 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5230 \begin_layout Standard
5231 The space between paragraphs,
5232 like the line spacing,
5233 the space between headings and text —
5235 all the spacing for just about everything —
5236 is pre-coded into \SpecialChar LyX
5239 you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5243 these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a range.
5246 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures fit on a page with text,
5247 so that sections don't start at the bottom of a page,
5252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5254 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5255 goes to produce a printable file.
5261 pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5263 gives you the ability globally to change
5267 these pre-coded spacings.
5268 We will explain more later.
5271 \begin_layout Subsection
5272 Paragraph Separation
5273 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5275 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5280 \begin_inset Index idx
5285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5287 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5304 \begin_layout Standard
5312 \begin_inset space ~
5320 \begin_inset space ~
5327 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5331 \begin_inset Index idx
5336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5338 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5352 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs,
5356 \begin_layout Subsection
5360 \begin_layout Standard
5361 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5364 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5366 \begin_inset space ~
5371 dialog and toggle the
5374 \begin_inset space ~
5379 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5382 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5386 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation,
5387 this button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling this).
5390 \begin_layout Standard
5391 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5394 \begin_layout Subsection
5396 \begin_inset Index idx
5401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5403 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5420 \begin_layout Standard
5423 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5427 \begin_inset Index idx
5432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5434 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5448 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5451 \begin_inset space ~
5460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5461 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5467 \begin_inset Index idx
5472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5475 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5489 installed to use this feature.
5494 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5496 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5498 \begin_inset space ~
5503 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing is normally defined in the environment's style.
5506 \begin_layout Section
5507 Paragraph Environments
5508 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5510 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5515 \begin_inset Index idx
5520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5522 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5537 \begin_inset Index idx
5542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5543 Paragraph environments
5551 \begin_layout Subsection
5555 \begin_layout Standard
5556 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5559 \begin_layout Standard
5568 } \SpecialChar ldots
5578 \begin_inset Newline newline
5581 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5583 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5585 or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally alien to you,
5586 we urge you to read the
5595 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5598 \begin_layout Standard
5599 A paragraph environment is simply a
5600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5607 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5608 This can include a particular style of font,
5615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5622 the different environments inside one another,
5623 allowing one environment to inherit some of the properties of another.
5624 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy tab stops,
5625 on the fly margin adjustment,
5626 and other hangovers from the days of typewriters.
5627 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular document type.
5628 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5631 \begin_layout Standard
5632 To choose a new paragraph environment,
5633 use the pull-down box
5634 \begin_inset Graphics
5635 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5641 at the left end of the toolbar.
5643 will change the environment of the
5647 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5648 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if you select them before choosing the new environment.
5651 \begin_layout Standard
5660 create a new paragraph using the
5664 paragraph environment.
5666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5673 because if you are in one of these environments:
5676 \begin_layout Itemize
5682 \begin_layout Itemize
5688 \begin_layout Itemize
5694 \begin_layout Itemize
5700 \begin_layout Itemize
5706 \begin_layout Itemize
5712 \begin_layout Itemize
5718 \begin_layout Standard
5720 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5725 rather than resetting it to
5730 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5731 \begin_inset space ~
5735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5737 reference "sec:Nesting"
5745 \begin_layout Subsection
5749 \begin_layout Standard
5750 The default paragraph environment is
5755 It creates a plain paragraph.
5757 resets the paragraph environment,
5758 this is the one it chooses.
5760 the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in this manual) are in the
5767 \begin_layout Standard
5768 You can nest a paragraph using the
5772 environment in just about anything else,
5773 but you can't really nest anything in a
5780 \begin_layout Subsection
5782 \begin_inset Index idx
5787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5789 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5806 \begin_layout Standard
5807 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5808 title page has three parts:
5810 the name(s) of the author(s) and a
5811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5818 for thanks or contact information.
5819 For certain types of documents,
5821 places all of this on a separate page along with today's date.
5822 For other types of documents,
5824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5831 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5834 \begin_layout Standard
5836 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph environments
5851 Here's how you use them:
5854 \begin_layout Itemize
5855 Put the title of your document in the
5862 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 Put the author name in the
5870 \begin_layout Itemize
5871 If you want the date to have a certain appearance,
5872 want to use a fixed date,
5873 or want other text to appear in place of today's date,
5874 put that text in the
5879 Note that using this environment is optional.
5880 If you don't provide any,
5882 will automatically insert today's date.
5883 If you don't want a date,
5886 Suppress default date on front page
5890 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5891 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5893 \begin_inset space ~
5901 \begin_layout Standard
5902 You can use footnotes to insert
5903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5910 or contact information.
5913 \begin_layout Subsection
5915 \begin_inset Index idx
5920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5927 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5929 name "subsec:Headings"
5936 \begin_layout Standard
5937 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5939 takes care of the numbering for you.
5942 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5944 \begin_inset Index idx
5949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5951 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5968 \begin_layout Standard
5969 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5973 \begin_layout Enumerate
5979 \begin_layout Enumerate
5985 \begin_layout Enumerate
5991 \begin_layout Enumerate
5997 \begin_layout Enumerate
6003 \begin_layout Enumerate
6009 \begin_layout Enumerate
6015 \begin_layout Standard
6017 labels each heading with a series of numbers,
6018 separated by periods.
6019 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
6020 Unlike the other headings,
6021 parts are numbered with Roman numerals.
6024 \begin_layout Standard
6025 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
6027 suppose you're writing a book.
6028 You group the book into chapters.
6030 does a similar grouping:
6033 \begin_layout Itemize
6038 is divided into either
6049 \begin_layout Itemize
6061 \begin_layout Itemize
6073 \begin_layout Itemize
6085 \begin_layout Itemize
6097 \begin_layout Itemize
6109 \begin_layout Standard
6110 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6119 Not all document types use the
6123 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
6128 is the top-level heading.
6136 \begin_layout Standard
6142 environment to label a new sub-subsection,
6144 labels it with its number,
6145 along with the number of the subsection,
6148 chapter that it's in.
6150 the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the label
6151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6163 \begin_inset Index idx
6168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6170 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6187 \begin_layout Standard
6188 The unnumbered section headings have a
6189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6196 at the end of their name.
6197 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in the table of contents,
6199 \begin_inset space ~
6203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6213 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6214 Changing the Numbering
6215 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6217 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
6224 \begin_layout Standard
6225 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear in the Table of Contents.
6227 this doesn't remove any of the levels;
6228 that's preset in the document class.
6229 Just as certain classes start with
6244 not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
6254 This is something you can change.
6257 \begin_layout Standard
6260 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6264 \begin_inset Index idx
6269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6271 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6288 \begin_inset space ~
6292 \begin_inset space ~
6297 you will see two counters.
6302 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
6303 numbers a section heading.
6304 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table of contents.
6307 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6308 Short Titles of Headings
6309 \begin_inset Index idx
6314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6316 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6331 \begin_inset Argument 1
6334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6343 name "sec:Short-Titles"
6350 \begin_layout Standard
6351 Some section or chapter titles,
6354 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
6356 if the header of the page is set to show the current section title,
6357 a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
6360 \begin_layout Standard
6362 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
6363 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6364 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6365 To specify a short title,
6366 set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6370 \begin_inset space ~
6376 This will insert a box labeled
6377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6381 \begin_inset space ~
6385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6388 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6389 This also works for captions inside floats.
6390 There can only be one short title per title.
6393 \begin_layout Standard
6394 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6401 \begin_layout Standard
6402 The following information applies to all section headings:
6405 \begin_layout Itemize
6406 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6409 \begin_layout Itemize
6410 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6413 \begin_layout Itemize
6414 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6417 \begin_layout Itemize
6418 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6421 \begin_layout Subsection
6425 \begin_layout Standard
6427 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6443 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6444 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6445 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below the text they contain.
6446 They also allow nesting,
6456 as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6459 \begin_layout Standard
6460 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments:
6469 when you start a new paragraph.
6471 you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6475 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6478 once you are done typing in that poem,
6479 you have to change back to the
6483 environment yourself.
6486 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6495 \begin_inset Index idx
6500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6509 \begin_layout Standard
6510 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments,
6511 it's time for the differences.
6520 are identical except for one difference:
6525 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
6534 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
6537 \begin_layout Standard
6538 Here's an example of the
6552 extending this line out further and further until it wraps.
6553 See – no indentation!
6557 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
6559 there's no indentation,
6560 but there is extra space between me and the other paragraph.
6563 \begin_layout Standard
6564 Here's another example,
6572 \begin_layout Quotation
6579 you will see the indentation.
6580 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting the first line,
6585 is the environment for you!
6591 you were quoting other text.
6594 \begin_layout Quotation
6595 Here's a new paragraph.
6596 I could ramble on and on,
6597 like a politician at election time.
6603 \begin_layout Standard
6604 As the examples show,
6609 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6610 They should put quotes in the
6615 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6619 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6622 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6624 \begin_inset Index idx
6629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6631 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6646 \begin_inset Index idx
6651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6658 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6667 \begin_layout Standard
6672 is a paragraph environment for poetry,
6681 \begin_inset Newline newline
6684 Which I did not rehearse!
6688 It could be much worse.
6689 This line could be long,
6692 so very long that it wraps around.
6693 It looks okay on screen,
6694 but in the printed version,
6695 the extra lines are indented a bit more than the first.
6697 so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6703 \begin_inset Newline newline
6706 And make things look fine
6707 \begin_inset Newline newline
6713 arg "newline-insert newline"
6719 \begin_layout Standard
6725 does not indent both margins.
6726 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6727 To separate the individual lines of a stanza,
6731 arg "newline-insert newline"
6737 \begin_layout Subsection
6739 \begin_inset Index idx
6744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6760 \begin_layout Standard
6762 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds of lists.
6773 labels your list items with bullets or numbers,
6785 lets you provide your own label.
6786 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after describing some general features of all four of them.
6789 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6793 \begin_layout Standard
6794 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments in several ways.
6797 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6806 reset the environment to
6810 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6811 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6812 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting depth,
6816 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6820 If you do this at the top level of a list,
6821 it returns you to the
6828 \begin_layout Standard
6829 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6832 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is nested.
6833 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments,
6834 we suggest you read all of section
6835 \begin_inset space ~
6839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6841 reference "sec:Nesting"
6849 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6851 \begin_inset Index idx
6856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6858 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6882 \begin_layout Standard
6883 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6887 paragraph environment.
6888 It has the following properties:
6891 \begin_layout Itemize
6892 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6896 \begin_layout Itemize
6898 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6901 \begin_layout Itemize
6902 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6906 \begin_layout Itemize
6907 The items can have any length.
6909 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6910 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6917 \begin_layout Itemize
6922 environment inside another
6927 the label changes to a new symbol.
6931 \begin_layout Itemize
6932 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6935 \begin_layout Itemize
6937 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6940 \begin_layout Itemize
6942 \begin_inset space ~
6946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6948 reference "sec:Nesting"
6953 for a full explanation of nesting.
6957 \begin_layout Standard
6959 that explanation was also an example of an
6968 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6971 \begin_layout Standard
6972 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6973 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6976 \begin_layout Itemize
6977 The label for the first level
6981 is a large black dot,
6986 \begin_layout Itemize
6987 The label for the second level is a dash.
6991 \begin_layout Itemize
6992 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6996 \begin_layout Itemize
6997 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
7001 \begin_layout Itemize
7002 Back out to the third level.
7006 \begin_layout Itemize
7007 Back to the second level.
7011 \begin_layout Itemize
7012 Back to the outermost level.
7015 \begin_layout Standard
7016 These are the default labels for an
7021 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
7023 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
7026 dialog in the submenu
7031 \begin_inset Index idx
7036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7052 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
7056 \begin_layout Standard
7057 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
7058 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths in section
7059 \begin_inset space ~
7063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7065 reference "sec:Nesting"
7073 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7075 \begin_inset Index idx
7080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7082 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7097 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7099 name "sec:Enumerate"
7106 \begin_layout Standard
7111 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
7112 It has these properties:
7115 \begin_layout Enumerate
7116 Each item has a numeral as its label.
7120 \begin_layout Enumerate
7121 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
7125 \begin_layout Enumerate
7127 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
7130 \begin_layout Enumerate
7135 environment resets the counter to one.
7138 \begin_layout Enumerate
7152 \begin_layout Enumerate
7153 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
7154 Items can have any length.
7157 \begin_layout Enumerate
7158 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
7161 \begin_layout Enumerate
7162 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
7165 \begin_layout Enumerate
7166 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
7170 \begin_layout Standard
7180 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
7182 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
7183 labels the four different levels in an
7190 \begin_layout Enumerate
7191 The first level of an
7195 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
7199 \begin_layout Enumerate
7200 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
7204 \begin_layout Enumerate
7205 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
7209 \begin_layout Enumerate
7210 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
7213 \begin_layout Enumerate
7215 notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth increases.
7219 \begin_layout Enumerate
7220 Back to the third level
7224 \begin_layout Enumerate
7225 Back to the second level.
7229 \begin_layout Enumerate
7230 Back to the outermost level.
7233 \begin_layout Standard
7234 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
7240 \begin_inset space ~
7244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7246 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7252 Such customization only shows up in the printed version,
7253 not in \SpecialChar LyX
7257 \begin_layout Standard
7258 There is more to nesting
7262 environments than we've stated here.
7263 You should read section
7264 \begin_inset space ~
7268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7270 reference "sec:Nesting"
7275 to learn more about nesting.
7278 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7280 \begin_inset Index idx
7285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7287 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7304 \begin_layout Standard
7305 Unlike the previous two environments,
7310 list has no fixed label.
7314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7321 of the first line as the label.
7325 \begin_layout Description
7327 This is an example of the
7334 \begin_layout Standard
7336 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the rest of the line.
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7348 it is meant that the first usage of the
7352 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an item.
7353 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
7361 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7366 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7367 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7369 \begin_inset space ~
7376 \begin_inset space ~
7380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7382 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
7387 for more information.) Here is an example:
7390 \begin_layout Description
7392 \begin_inset space ~
7396 This one shows how to use a
7399 \begin_inset space ~
7411 \begin_layout Description
7417 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
7418 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text that describes it.
7419 It's not a good idea to use a
7423 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
7424 You're better off using
7436 paragraphs into them.
7439 \begin_layout Description
7445 environments inside one another,
7446 nest them in other types of lists,
7450 \begin_layout Standard
7451 Notice that after the first line,
7453 indents subsequent lines,
7454 offsetting them from the first line.
7457 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7459 \begin_inset Index idx
7464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7466 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7483 \begin_layout Standard
7488 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7489 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
7493 \begin_layout Standard
7502 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional features.
7503 Here are its properties:
7506 \begin_layout Labeling
7507 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7509 \begin_inset space ~
7512 labels \SpecialChar LyX
7514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7521 of each line as the item label.
7526 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
7527 If you need to use more than one word in an item label,
7528 use a non-breaking space as described above.
7531 \begin_layout Labeling
7532 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7533 margins As you can see,
7535 uses different margins for the item label and the body of the item text.
7536 The body of the text has a larger left margin,
7537 which is equal to the default label width plus a little extra space.
7540 \begin_layout Labeling
7541 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7543 \begin_inset space ~
7546 width \SpecialChar LyX
7547 uses the width of the label,
7548 or the default width,
7550 If the label width is larger,
7552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7559 into the first line.
7561 the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left margin of the rest of the item text.
7564 \begin_layout Labeling
7565 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7567 \begin_inset space ~
7570 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all items in a
7574 environment has the same left margin.
7575 \begin_inset Newline newline
7578 To change the default width,
7579 select all items in the list.
7582 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
7584 \begin_inset space ~
7589 dialog (toolbar button
7592 arg "layout-paragraph"
7599 \begin_inset space ~
7604 determines the default label width.
7605 You can use the text of your largest label here,
7606 but you can also use the letter
7607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7614 multiple times instead.
7615 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
7618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7625 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
7628 \begin_inset space ~
7633 every time you alter a label in a
7638 \begin_inset Newline newline
7641 The predefined default width is the length of
7642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7650 \begin_inset space ~
7656 \begin_layout Standard
7661 list the same way as the
7666 When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes it.
7671 environment gives you another way to do this,
7672 using a different overall layout.
7675 \begin_layout Standard
7680 lists inside one another,
7681 nest them in other types of lists,
7683 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
7685 \begin_inset space ~
7689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7691 reference "sec:Nesting"
7696 to learn about nesting.
7699 \begin_layout Standard
7700 There is yet another feature of the
7705 As you can see in the examples,
7707 left-justifies the item labels by default.
7708 You can use additional
7712 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7713 justifies the item label.
7718 are documented in section
7719 \begin_inset space ~
7723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7725 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7731 Here are some examples:
7734 \begin_layout Labeling
7735 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7736 Left The default for
7743 \begin_layout Labeling
7744 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7745 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7752 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7755 \begin_layout Labeling
7756 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7757 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7761 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7768 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7771 \begin_layout Subsection
7773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7775 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7780 \begin_inset Index idx
7785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7787 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7804 \begin_layout Standard
7805 The features described in this section require that the module
7807 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7809 is loaded in the document settings.
7810 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7816 \begin_inset Index idx
7821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7824 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7841 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7842 Custom Enumerate Lists
7843 \begin_inset Index idx
7848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7850 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7860 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7877 \begin_layout Standard
7879 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional argument (menu
7881 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7884 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7885 There you add the command
7888 \begin_layout Standard
7896 \begin_layout Standard
7908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7909 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7912 \begin_inset space ~
7916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7918 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7932 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7939 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7940 For capital Roman numerals replace
7952 in the command above.
7953 For Arabic numerals use
7961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7968 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7984 \begin_layout Standard
7986 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7995 You can only number 26
7996 \begin_inset space ~
7999 items with Latin letters,
8000 because this numbering is limited to single letters.
8008 \begin_layout Standard
8009 To change the numbering for the list sublevels,
8010 replace the 'i' in the command by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi,
8016 \begin_layout Standard
8017 Here is a list with custom numbering:
8020 \begin_layout Enumerate
8021 \begin_inset Argument 1
8024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8050 \begin_layout Enumerate
8051 \begin_inset Argument 1
8054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8077 \begin_layout Enumerate
8082 \begin_layout Enumerate
8083 \begin_inset Argument 1
8086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8110 \begin_layout Enumerate
8111 \begin_inset Argument 1
8114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8140 \begin_layout Standard
8141 For this list these commands were used:
8144 \begin_layout Standard
8155 \begin_inset Newline newline
8163 \begin_inset Newline newline
8171 \begin_inset Newline newline
8181 \begin_layout Standard
8188 makes the label emphasized and
8197 \begin_layout Standard
8198 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8207 When you change the label of a list level,
8208 it will be used for all following lists until you change the definition.
8216 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8218 \begin_inset Index idx
8223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8225 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8235 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8252 \begin_layout Standard
8253 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
8256 \begin_layout Enumerate
8257 \begin_inset Argument 1
8260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8279 \begin_inset Note Note
8282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8283 goes back to default numbering
8291 \begin_layout Enumerate
8295 \begin_layout Standard
8299 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
8303 \begin_layout Standard
8304 To resume an enumeration,
8313 \begin_layout Standard
8314 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8323 If there is no previous enumeration to resume,
8324 you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
8333 \begin_layout Standard
8334 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the next one.
8335 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
8336 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item of a normal enumeration.
8341 \begin_layout Standard
8347 \begin_layout Standard
8352 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
8356 \begin_layout Enumerate
8360 \begin_layout Enumerate
8364 \begin_layout Standard
8365 Enumeration starting at a given value:
8368 \begin_layout Enumerate
8369 \begin_inset Argument 1
8372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8388 This enumeration starts at 4
8391 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8393 \begin_inset Index idx
8398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8400 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8417 \begin_layout Standard
8418 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items of a list.
8419 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
8422 \begin_layout Itemize
8426 \begin_layout Itemize
8427 with standard spacing
8430 \begin_layout Standard
8431 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item of the list.
8432 Add there the command
8436 to get no additional list space like in this example:
8439 \begin_layout Itemize
8440 \begin_inset Argument 1
8443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8462 \begin_layout Itemize
8466 \begin_layout Itemize
8470 \begin_layout Standard
8471 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8477 \begin_inset Index idx
8482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8485 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8500 For more information see its documentation,
8502 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8512 \begin_layout Standard
8513 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing and indentation.
8514 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs in the document and the label separation was set to 2
8515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8518 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
8521 \begin_layout Enumerate
8522 \begin_inset Argument 1
8525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8547 \begin_layout Enumerate
8548 with negative indentation
8551 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8552 Further Customization
8553 \begin_inset Index idx
8558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8560 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8577 \begin_layout Standard
8578 You can also change the style of description lists.
8582 \begin_layout Standard
8588 \begin_layout Standard
8589 changes the description label font,
8593 \begin_layout Standard
8599 \begin_layout Standard
8600 sets the list style.
8603 \begin_layout Standard
8604 An example where the command
8607 \begin_layout Standard
8616 \begin_layout Standard
8620 \begin_layout Description
8622 \begin_inset space ~
8627 \begin_inset Argument 1
8630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8651 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules,
8652 therefore ionizing them.
8655 \begin_layout Description
8657 \begin_inset space ~
8661 In computer science,
8662 reference counting is a technique of storing the number of references,
8664 or handles to a resource such as an object,
8666 disk space or other resource.
8669 \begin_layout Standard
8670 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8676 \begin_inset Index idx
8681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8684 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8699 For more information see its documentation
8700 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8710 \begin_layout Subsection
8712 \begin_inset Index idx
8717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8726 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8728 \begin_inset space ~
8735 \begin_layout Standard
8736 Although \SpecialChar LyX
8737 has document classes for letters,
8738 we've also created two paragraph environments called
8745 \begin_inset space ~
8751 To use the letter class,
8752 you need to use specific paragraph environments in a specific order,
8753 otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
8754 gags on the document.
8763 \begin_inset space ~
8768 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
8769 You can even nest them inside other environments,
8770 though you can't nest anything in them.
8773 \begin_layout Standard
8775 you're not limited to using
8782 \begin_inset space ~
8791 \begin_inset space ~
8798 is useful for creating article titles like those used in some European academic papers.
8801 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8805 name "sec:Address-Usage"
8812 \begin_layout Standard
8817 environment formats text in the style of an address,
8818 which is also used for the opening and signature in some countries.
8823 \begin_inset space ~
8828 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address,
8829 which is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
8830 Here's an example of each:
8833 \begin_layout Right Address
8835 \begin_inset Newline newline
8839 \begin_inset Newline newline
8843 \begin_inset Newline newline
8850 \begin_layout Standard
8854 \begin_inset space ~
8860 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin,
8861 which \SpecialChar LyX
8862 sets to fit the largest block of text on a single line.
8863 Here's an example of the
8870 \begin_layout Address
8872 \begin_inset Newline newline
8875 Where do I send this
8876 \begin_inset Newline newline
8879 Your post office and country
8882 \begin_layout Standard
8891 \begin_inset space ~
8896 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8901 in either of these environments,
8903 resets the nesting depth and sets the environment to
8918 and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8927 arg "newline-insert newline"
8932 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8933 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8935 \begin_inset space ~
8939 \begin_inset space ~
8944 ) to start a new line in an
8951 \begin_inset space ~
8959 \begin_layout Subsection
8963 \begin_layout Standard
8964 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography or list of references.
8966 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8969 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8971 \begin_inset Index idx
8976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8985 \begin_layout Standard
8990 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8992 you could use this environment anywhere,
8993 but you really should only use it at the beginning of the document,
8996 don't bother trying to nest
9000 in anything else or vice versa.
9006 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
9007 The book document classes ignores the
9012 and it's utterly silly to use
9016 in a letter document class.
9019 \begin_layout Standard
9024 environment does several things for you.
9026 it puts the centered label
9027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9035 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical space.
9037 it typesets everything in a smaller font,
9038 just as you'd expect.
9040 it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and the subsequent text.
9042 that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
9044 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are using.
9047 \begin_layout Standard
9048 Starting a new paragraph by entering
9052 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9053 The new paragraph will still be in the
9059 you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you finish entering the abstract of your document.
9062 \begin_layout Standard
9063 \begin_inset Float figure
9070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9072 \begin_inset Graphics
9073 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
9080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9081 \begin_inset Caption Standard
9083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9086 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9107 \begin_layout Standard
9108 We would love to demonstrate the
9113 but since this document is in the
9114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9123 We inserted it therefore as figure
9124 \begin_inset space ~
9128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9130 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9136 If you have never heard of an
9137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9145 you can safely ignore this environment.
9148 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9150 \begin_inset Index idx
9155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9164 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
9171 \begin_layout Standard
9176 environment is used to list references.
9178 you could use this environment anywhere,
9179 but you really should only use it at the end of the document.
9191 \begin_layout Standard
9192 When you first open a
9198 adds a large vertical space,
9199 followed by the heading
9200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9215 depending on the document class.
9216 The heading is in a large boldface font.
9217 Each paragraph of the
9221 environment is a bibliography entry.
9227 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9228 Each new paragraph is still in the
9235 \begin_layout Standard
9237 usually better way to include references in your document by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
9239 For more information on that,
9240 and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
9241 's bibliography handling,
9242 have a look at section
9243 \begin_inset space ~
9247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9249 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9257 \begin_layout Subsection
9258 Special Environments
9261 \begin_layout Standard
9263 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
9266 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9271 \begin_inset Index idx
9276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9284 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9286 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
9293 \begin_layout Standard
9299 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
9301 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
9306 key as a fixed whitespace.
9310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9324 \begin_inset space ~
9329 instead of an end-of-word marker.
9348 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in \SpecialChar LyX
9350 If you need to insert blank lines,
9351 you will still need to use
9354 arg "newline-insert newline"
9373 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9375 when you finish using the
9381 you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
9388 environment inside of others.
9391 \begin_layout Standard
9392 There are a few quirks with this environment:
9395 \begin_layout Itemize
9399 arg "newline-insert newline"
9402 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
9403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9407 \begin_inset space \space{}
9417 arg "newline-insert newline"
9423 \begin_layout Itemize
9427 arg "newline-insert newline"
9437 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
9443 \begin_layout Itemize
9444 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
9445 You must put at least one
9449 in any line you want blank.
9455 \begin_layout Itemize
9456 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
9460 since that will insert
9465 You get the typewriter double quotes with
9468 arg "self-insert \""
9474 \begin_layout Standard
9478 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9482 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9486 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9490 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9494 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9495 printf("Hello World!
9500 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9504 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9508 \begin_layout Standard
9509 This is just the standard
9510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9520 \begin_layout Standard
9528 such as program source,
9529 shell scripts and so on.
9530 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text as if you used a typewriter.
9531 \begin_inset Index idx
9536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9537 Paragraph environments
9542 For longer parts of programming code,
9543 use the listings inset that is described in the chapter
9545 Program Code Listings
9550 \begin_inset space ~
9558 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9562 \begin_inset Index idx
9567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9576 \begin_layout Standard
9581 environment is similar to the
9586 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a computer console text.
9591 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
9605 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a non-breaking space) and you can have empty lines.
9619 \begin_layout Itemize
9620 have a certain language and a text style
9623 \begin_layout Itemize
9626 foot- and margin notes,
9630 index- and nomenclature entries,
9635 floats and \SpecialChar TeX
9639 \begin_layout Standard
9640 Because of these properties
9644 works like a typewriter.
9648 \begin_layout Verbatim
9653 \begin_layout Verbatim
9657 The following 2 lines are empty:
9660 \begin_layout Verbatim
9664 \begin_layout Verbatim
9668 \begin_layout Verbatim
9670 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
9675 \begin_layout Standard
9680 environment is identical to
9684 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
9685 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
9692 \begin_layout Verbatim*
9697 \begin_layout Section
9698 Nesting Environments
9699 \begin_inset Index idx
9704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9706 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9730 \begin_layout Subsection
9734 \begin_layout Standard
9736 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific properties.
9737 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of another block.
9738 For example you have three main points in an outline,
9739 but point #2 also has two subpoints.
9741 you have a list inside of another list,
9743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9753 \begin_layout Enumerate
9757 \begin_layout Enumerate
9762 \begin_layout Enumerate
9766 \begin_layout Enumerate
9771 \begin_layout Enumerate
9775 \begin_layout Standard
9776 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
9777 Nesting an environment is quite simple:
9780 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
9782 \begin_inset space ~
9786 \begin_inset space ~
9794 \begin_inset space ~
9798 \begin_inset space ~
9803 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are nested).
9804 Instead of the menu,
9805 you can also use the toolbar buttons
9808 arg "depth-increment"
9814 arg "depth-decrement"
9828 arg "depth-increment"
9834 arg "depth-decrement"
9838 The change will work on the current selection,
9839 if you have made one (allowing you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once),
9840 or the current paragraph.
9843 \begin_layout Standard
9844 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
9845 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
9846 If it is invalid to do so,
9847 nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
9849 if you change the depth of one paragraph,
9850 it affects the depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
9853 \begin_layout Standard
9854 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
9857 you can nest just about anything inside anything else,
9858 as you're about to find out.
9859 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
9862 \begin_layout Subsection
9863 What You Can and Can't Nest
9866 \begin_layout Standard
9867 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you,
9868 we need to tell you a little bit more about how nesting works.
9871 \begin_layout Standard
9872 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated than a simple yes or no.
9873 There are three types of paragraph environments:
9876 \begin_layout Itemize
9877 Completely unnestable
9880 \begin_layout Itemize
9882 you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other things inside them.
9885 \begin_layout Itemize
9887 you can nest them into other environments,
9888 but you can't nest anything into them.
9891 \begin_layout Standard
9892 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior,
9893 and which paragraph environments have them:
9896 \begin_layout Description
9897 Unnestable Can't nest them.
9898 Can't nest into them.
9902 \begin_layout Itemize
9908 \begin_layout Itemize
9914 \begin_layout Itemize
9920 \begin_layout Itemize
9926 \begin_layout Itemize
9933 \begin_layout Description
9935 \begin_inset space ~
9938 Nestable You can nest them.
9939 You can nest other things into them.
9943 \begin_layout Itemize
9949 \begin_layout Itemize
9955 \begin_layout Itemize
9961 \begin_layout Itemize
9967 \begin_layout Itemize
9973 \begin_layout Itemize
9979 \begin_layout Itemize
9985 \begin_layout Itemize
9992 \begin_layout Itemize
9998 \begin_layout Itemize
10005 \begin_layout Description
10006 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
10007 You can't nest anything into them.
10011 \begin_layout Itemize
10017 \begin_layout Itemize
10023 \begin_layout Itemize
10029 \begin_layout Itemize
10035 \begin_layout Itemize
10041 \begin_layout Itemize
10047 \begin_layout Itemize
10053 \begin_layout Itemize
10059 \begin_layout Itemize
10065 \begin_layout Itemize
10071 \begin_layout Itemize
10077 \begin_layout Itemize
10083 \begin_layout Itemize
10089 \begin_layout Itemize
10093 \begin_inset space ~
10099 \begin_layout Itemize
10106 \begin_layout Standard
10107 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10116 Although it is possible,
10118 to nest numbered section headings like
10129 \begin_inset space ~
10133 it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas nested section headings violate this.
10141 \begin_layout Subsection
10142 Nesting Other Things:
10147 \begin_inset Index idx
10152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10154 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10171 \begin_layout Standard
10172 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments,
10173 but which are affected by nesting anyhow.
10177 \begin_layout Itemize
10181 \begin_layout Itemize
10185 \begin_layout Itemize
10189 \begin_layout Standard
10191 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10200 Figures and tables in
10204 are not affected by this.
10209 Have a look at section
10210 \begin_inset space ~
10214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10216 reference "sec:Floats"
10221 for more information about
10228 \begin_layout Standard
10230 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
10233 or an equation is inline,
10234 it goes wherever the paragraph it is in goes.
10237 \begin_layout Standard
10239 if you have an equation,
10240 figure or table in a
10241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10249 it behaves just like a
10250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10257 paragraph environment.
10258 You can nest it into any environment,
10259 but you obviously can't nest anything into it.
10262 \begin_layout Standard
10263 Here's an example with a table:
10266 \begin_layout Enumerate
10271 \begin_layout Enumerate
10272 This is (a) and it's nested.
10276 \begin_layout Standard
10277 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10283 \begin_layout Standard
10285 \begin_inset Tabular
10286 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10287 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10288 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10289 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10373 \begin_layout Standard
10374 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10381 \begin_layout Enumerate
10383 The table is actually nested inside (a).
10387 \begin_layout Enumerate
10391 \begin_layout Standard
10392 If we hadn't nested the table at all,
10393 the list would look like this:
10396 \begin_layout Enumerate
10401 \begin_layout Enumerate
10402 This is (a) and it's nested.
10406 \begin_layout Standard
10407 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10413 \begin_layout Standard
10415 \begin_inset Tabular
10416 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10417 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10418 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10419 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10503 \begin_layout Standard
10504 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10510 \begin_layout Enumerate
10518 it's not nested at all.
10521 \begin_layout Enumerate
10525 \begin_layout Standard
10526 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested,
10527 but is also the first item of a new list!
10530 \begin_layout Standard
10531 There's another trap you can fall into:
10533 but not going deep enough.
10535 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
10538 \begin_layout Enumerate
10543 \begin_layout Enumerate
10544 This is (a) and it's nested.
10547 \begin_layout Standard
10548 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10554 \begin_layout Standard
10556 \begin_inset Tabular
10557 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10558 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10559 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10560 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10645 \begin_layout Standard
10646 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10652 \begin_layout Enumerate
10654 The table is actually nested inside Item One,
10662 \begin_layout Enumerate
10666 \begin_layout Standard
10668 item (b) turned into the first item of a new list,
10674 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
10676 if you nest tables,
10677 figures or equations,
10678 make sure you go to the right depth!
10681 \begin_layout Subsection
10682 Usage and General Features
10685 \begin_layout Standard
10686 Speaking of levels,
10688 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
10691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10698 is the innermost possible depth.
10699 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
10702 \begin_layout Enumerate
10703 level #1 – outermost
10707 \begin_layout Enumerate
10712 \begin_layout Enumerate
10717 \begin_layout Enumerate
10722 \begin_layout Itemize
10727 \begin_layout Itemize
10736 \begin_layout Standard
10737 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit,
10738 and you can see both of them in the example.
10739 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments,
10740 you can only perform a four-fold nesting with the
10750 if we tried to nest another
10755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10763 we would get errors.
10766 \begin_layout Subsection
10768 \begin_inset Index idx
10773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10775 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10792 \begin_layout Standard
10793 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
10794 We have several examples of nested environments.
10796 we explain how we created the example,
10797 so that you can reproduce them.
10800 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10802 The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
10805 \begin_layout Labeling
10806 \labelwidthstring MMM
10807 #1-a This is the outermost level.
10816 \begin_layout Labeling
10817 \labelwidthstring MMM
10818 #2-a This is level #2.
10819 We created it by using
10822 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10828 arg "depth-increment"
10835 \begin_layout Labeling
10836 \labelwidthstring MMM
10837 #3-a This is level #3.
10847 arg "depth-increment"
10851 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
10855 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10861 arg "depth-increment"
10868 \begin_layout Standard
10875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10885 We did this by entering
10888 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10895 arg "depth-increment"
10899 then changing the paragraph environment to
10904 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph —
10905 it also works for the
10922 \begin_layout Standard
10932 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10938 \begin_layout Labeling
10939 \labelwidthstring MMM
10940 #4-a This is level #4.
10944 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10947 and changed the paragraph environment back to
10953 we can't nest anything inside a
10958 which is why we're still at level #4.
10964 keep nesting things inside
10965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10976 \begin_layout Labeling
10977 \labelwidthstring MMM
10978 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10983 \begin_layout Labeling
10984 \labelwidthstring MMM
10985 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10986 and this is level #6.
10988 you should know how we made these two.
10992 \begin_layout Labeling
10993 \labelwidthstring MMM
10994 #5-b Back to level #5.
10998 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11004 arg "depth-decrement"
11011 \begin_layout Labeling
11012 \labelwidthstring MMM
11016 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11022 arg "depth-decrement"
11026 we're back at level #4.
11030 \begin_layout Labeling
11031 \labelwidthstring MMM
11032 #3-b Back to level #3.
11033 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
11037 \begin_layout Labeling
11038 \labelwidthstring MMM
11039 #2-b Back to level #2.
11043 \begin_layout Labeling
11044 \labelwidthstring MMM
11046 back to the outermost level,
11048 After this sentence,
11053 and change the paragraph environment back to
11060 \begin_layout Standard
11061 We could have also used the
11080 environment in place of the
11085 The example would have worked exactly the same.
11088 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11093 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11094 This is the LyX-Code environment,
11099 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11109 arg "depth-increment"
11114 \begin_inset Newline newline
11118 we will change to the
11126 \begin_layout Enumerate
11135 \begin_layout Enumerate
11136 Notice how the nested
11140 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
11145 but also inherits its font and spacing!
11149 \begin_layout Standard
11150 We ended this example by entering
11156 we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
11160 and reset the nesting depth by using
11163 arg "depth-decrement"
11169 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11182 \begin_inset Argument 1
11185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11188 Levels and other list environments
11196 \begin_layout Enumerate
11202 paragraph environment.
11203 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
11207 \begin_layout Enumerate
11212 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11218 arg "depth-increment"
11223 what happens if we nest an
11227 environment inside of this one?
11228 It will be at level #3,
11229 but what will its label be?
11234 \begin_layout Itemize
11246 even though it's at level #3.
11248 its label is a bullet.
11249 (We got here by using
11252 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11259 arg "depth-increment"
11263 then changing the environment to
11271 \begin_layout Itemize
11276 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11283 arg "depth-increment"
11287 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
11292 \begin_layout Enumerate
11294 to get to level #5.
11297 we also changed the paragraph environment back to
11302 Notice the type of numbering,
11308 because we are in the
11316 environment (that is,
11332 \begin_layout Enumerate
11337 change the paragraph environment,
11338 but decrease the nesting depth?
11339 What type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
11343 \begin_layout Enumerate
11345 as if you couldn't guess by now,
11349 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11352 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
11355 \begin_layout Enumerate
11359 arg "depth-decrement"
11362 to decrease the depth after the next
11365 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11372 \begin_layout Enumerate
11374 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
11379 \begin_layout Enumerate
11381 Even though we've changed levels,
11383 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral as the label.Why?
11386 \begin_layout Enumerate
11388 even though the nesting depth has changed,
11400 that \SpecialChar LyX
11405 reset the counter for the label.
11409 \begin_layout Enumerate
11413 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11419 arg "depth-decrement"
11423 and we're back to level #2.
11425 we not only changed the nesting depth,
11426 but we also moved back into the twofold-nested
11434 \begin_layout Enumerate
11435 The same thing happens if we do another
11438 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11444 arg "depth-decrement"
11447 sequence and return to level #1,
11448 the outermost level.
11451 \begin_layout Standard
11453 we reset the environment to
11459 the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling \SpecialChar LyX
11469 The number of other
11473 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
11479 The same rule applies for the
11487 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11492 \begin_layout Enumerate
11493 We're going to go totally nuts now.
11494 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples,
11495 nor will we go into the same detail with how we did it.
11505 \begin_layout Standard
11514 arg "depth-increment"
11523 level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created the example in parentheses someplace.
11525 the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
11526 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
11527 Either before or after this,
11528 we will put in the level.
11532 \begin_layout Enumerate
11539 level #1) This is the next item in the list.
11543 \begin_layout Verse
11544 Now we will add verse.
11545 \begin_inset Newline newline
11548 It will get much worse.
11549 \begin_inset Newline newline
11560 arg "depth-increment"
11572 \begin_layout Verse
11575 \begin_inset Newline newline
11578 Bippitey boppitey boo!
11579 \begin_inset Newline newline
11585 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11593 \begin_layout Verse
11594 Here comes a table:
11598 \begin_layout Standard
11599 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11605 \begin_layout Standard
11607 \begin_inset Tabular
11608 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
11609 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11610 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11611 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
11616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
11654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11696 \begin_layout Verse
11700 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11712 arg "depth-increment"
11719 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11726 \begin_inset Newline newline
11734 arg "depth-decrement"
11741 \begin_layout Enumerate
11748 level #1) This is another item.
11749 Note that selecting a
11753 resets the nesting depth to level #1,
11754 so we increased the nesting depth 3 times to put the table inside the
11761 \begin_layout Quotation
11762 We're now ending the
11766 list and changing to
11771 We're still at level #1.
11772 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
11773 The next set of paragraphs is a
11774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11781 We will nest both the
11788 \begin_inset space ~
11793 environments inside of this one,
11794 then use another nested
11798 for the letter body.
11802 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11805 to preserve the depth.
11806 Remember that you need to use
11809 arg "newline-insert newline"
11812 to create multiple lines inside the
11819 \begin_inset space ~
11829 \begin_layout Right Address
11831 \begin_inset Newline newline
11836 \begin_inset Newline newline
11842 \begin_layout Address
11844 \begin_inset space ~
11850 \begin_layout Quotation
11851 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
11852 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11855 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
11857 several of our cows have mysteriously exploded,
11858 creating a backlog in our orders for methane.
11859 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order as soon as possible.
11861 we thank you for your patience.
11864 \begin_layout Quotation
11867 now have a special on beef.
11868 If you are interested,
11869 please return the enclosed pricing and order form with your order,
11870 along with payment.
11873 \begin_layout Quotation
11874 We thank you again for your patience.
11877 \begin_layout Address
11879 \begin_inset Newline newline
11886 \begin_layout Quotation
11887 That ends that example!
11890 \begin_layout Standard
11892 nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
11893 gives you a lot of power with just a few keystrokes.
11894 We could have easily nested an
11916 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
11919 \begin_layout Subsection
11921 \begin_inset Index idx
11926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11928 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
11931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11943 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11945 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
11952 \begin_layout Standard
11953 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
11954 For example you need two different enumerations:
11957 \begin_layout Enumerate
11962 \begin_layout Enumerate
11967 \begin_layout Enumerate
11971 \begin_layout Standard
11972 \begin_inset Separator plain
11978 \begin_layout Itemize
11984 \begin_layout Standard
11985 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
11991 \begin_layout Enumerate
11995 \begin_layout Enumerate
11999 \begin_layout Enumerate
12003 \begin_layout Standard
12004 To split an existing list into two lists,
12005 set the cursor at the end of a list item and use the menu
12007 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12008 Separated <Name> Above
12012 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12013 Separated <Name> Below
12016 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
12017 ) and before or behind it the new list.
12018 Inside nested environments,
12019 it is also possible to split the outer environment.
12022 \begin_layout Standard
12023 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
12024 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
12027 \begin_layout Standard
12029 you get an environment separator when you press
12032 arg "paragraph-break"
12039 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
12042 \begin_layout Section
12044 Pagination and Line Breaks
12045 \begin_inset Index idx
12050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12059 \begin_layout Standard
12061 While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors,
12063 offers you more spaces:
12064 spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot be broken at the end of a line.
12065 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are useful.
12068 \begin_layout Subsection
12070 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12072 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
12077 \begin_inset Index idx
12082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12084 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12101 \begin_layout Standard
12102 The non-breaking space:
12103 It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
12104 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
12105 ) not to automatically break the line at that point.
12106 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks,
12110 \begin_layout Quote
12111 Further documentation is given in section
12112 \begin_inset Newline newline
12116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12118 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12126 \begin_layout Standard
12128 it would be a good thing to put a non-breaking space between
12129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12143 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12153 A non-breaking space is set with
12155 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12156 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12158 \begin_inset space ~
12166 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
12172 \begin_layout Subsection
12174 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12176 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12181 \begin_inset Index idx
12186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12188 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12205 \begin_layout Standard
12206 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
12208 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12209 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12213 The length units are listed in Appendix
12214 \begin_inset space ~
12218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12220 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12228 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12232 name "subsec:Normal-Space"
12237 \begin_inset Index idx
12242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12244 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12261 \begin_layout Standard
12262 With the introduction of typewriters,
12263 it became conventional in some countries to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters at the ends of sentences.
12264 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
12265 automatically takes care about this.
12267 you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation followed by a period;
12269 \begin_inset space ~
12273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12275 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
12281 To insert a normal space,
12284 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12285 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12287 \begin_inset space ~
12295 arg "space-insert normal"
12301 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12302 Non-Breaking Thin Space
12303 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12305 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
12310 \begin_inset Index idx
12315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12317 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12334 \begin_layout Standard
12336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12339 non-breaking thin space
12340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12343 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
12344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12352 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide,
12354 inside abbreviations:
12357 \begin_layout Quote
12359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12363 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
12366 \begin_layout Standard
12367 or between values and units.
12368 Compare for example this:
12369 \begin_inset Newline newline
12373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12377 \begin_inset Newline newline
12380 10 kg (normal space)
12383 \begin_layout Standard
12384 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
12386 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12387 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12389 \begin_inset space ~
12393 \begin_inset space ~
12401 arg "space-insert thin"
12407 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12411 \begin_layout Standard
12412 You can also insert the following space types:
12415 \begin_layout Description
12417 \begin_inset space ~
12420 space A line with a
12421 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12425 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
12429 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12432 medium space between the arrows.
12435 \begin_layout Description
12437 \begin_inset space ~
12440 space A line with a
12441 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12445 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
12449 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12452 thick space between the arrows.
12455 \begin_layout Description
12457 \begin_inset space ~
12461 \begin_inset space ~
12464 space A line with a
12465 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12469 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
12473 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12476 negative thin space between the arrows.
12479 \begin_layout Description
12481 \begin_inset space ~
12485 \begin_inset space ~
12488 space A line with a
12489 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12493 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
12497 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12500 negative medium space between the arrows.
12503 \begin_layout Description
12505 \begin_inset space ~
12509 \begin_inset space ~
12512 space A line with a
12513 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12517 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
12521 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12524 negative thick space between the arrows.
12527 \begin_layout Description
12529 \begin_inset space ~
12533 \begin_inset space ~
12537 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12541 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12545 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
12549 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12553 \begin_inset space ~
12557 \begin_inset space ~
12561 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12564 em) space between the arrows.
12567 \begin_layout Description
12569 \begin_inset space ~
12573 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12577 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12581 \begin_inset space \quad{}
12585 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12589 \begin_inset space ~
12593 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12596 em) space between the arrows.
12599 \begin_layout Description
12601 \begin_inset space ~
12605 \begin_inset space ~
12609 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12613 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12617 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
12621 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12625 \begin_inset space ~
12629 \begin_inset space ~
12633 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12636 em) space between the arrows.
12639 \begin_layout Description
12641 \begin_inset space ~
12645 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12649 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
12654 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12661 cm space between the arrows.
12664 \begin_layout Standard
12666 \begin_inset space ~
12670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12672 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
12677 lists the different space sizes.
12680 \begin_layout Standard
12681 \begin_inset Float table
12688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12689 \begin_inset Caption Standard
12691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12692 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12694 name "tab:Width-of-the"
12698 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
12706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12708 \begin_inset Tabular
12709 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
12710 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
12711 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
12712 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
12714 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12725 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12738 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12747 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12752 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12762 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12766 Non-breaking Normal
12771 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12776 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12786 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12795 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12804 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
12808 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12818 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12827 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12832 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12842 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12851 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12856 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12866 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12875 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12880 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12890 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12899 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12904 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12914 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12923 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12928 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12938 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12943 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12951 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12956 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12960 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
12964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12974 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12987 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12992 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13002 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13015 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13041 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13043 \begin_inset Index idx
13048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13050 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13067 \begin_layout Standard
13068 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
13069 feature for adding extra space in a uniform fashion.
13070 An Horizontal Fill is actually a variable length space,
13071 whose length always equals the remaining space between the left and right margins.
13072 If there is more than one Horizontal Fill on a line,
13073 they divide the available space equally between themselves.
13076 \begin_layout Standard
13077 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
13080 \begin_layout Quote
13082 This is on the left side
13083 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13086 This is on the right
13089 \begin_layout Quote
13092 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13096 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13102 \begin_layout Quote
13105 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13109 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13113 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13119 \begin_layout Standard
13120 That was an example in the
13126 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13130 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13134 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13137 is one in a standard paragraph.
13138 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text,
13143 sitting in-between the two arrows.
13146 \begin_layout Standard
13147 Horizontal Fills can be made visible when you choose one of the
13150 \begin_inset space ~
13155 s in the space dialog:
13156 The following patterns are available:
13159 \begin_layout Standard
13162 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
13166 \begin_inset space ~
13172 \begin_layout Standard
13175 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
13179 \begin_inset space ~
13185 \begin_layout Standard
13188 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
13192 \begin_inset space ~
13198 \begin_layout Standard
13201 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
13205 \begin_inset space ~
13211 \begin_layout Standard
13212 Down brace (= opened downwards):
13214 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
13218 \begin_inset space ~
13224 \begin_layout Standard
13225 Up brace (= opened upwards):
13227 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
13231 \begin_inset space ~
13237 \begin_layout Standard
13238 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13247 If an Horizontal Fill is at the beginning of a line,
13252 in the first line in a paragraph,
13255 This prevents Horizontal Fills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
13256 If you need space in this case anyway,
13261 option in the space dialog.
13269 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13271 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13273 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
13278 \begin_inset Index idx
13283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13285 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13302 \begin_layout Standard
13303 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
13305 you want to create the following multiple choice question:
13308 \begin_layout Standard
13309 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
13312 What is correct English?:
13313 \begin_inset Newline newline
13317 \begin_inset Newline newline
13321 \begin_inset space ~
13324 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
13325 \begin_inset Newline newline
13329 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13340 \begin_inset Newline newline
13344 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13355 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
13361 \begin_layout Standard
13363 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
13364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13368 \begin_inset space ~
13372 \begin_inset space ~
13376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13381 you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
13383 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13384 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13388 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two lines and insert
13389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13393 \begin_inset space ~
13397 \begin_inset space ~
13401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13404 into the phantom inset (note the space after
13405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13413 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
13414 That is why it is named
13415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13423 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
13424 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding dimension.
13427 \begin_layout Subsection
13429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13431 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
13436 \begin_inset Index idx
13441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13443 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13460 \begin_layout Standard
13461 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph,
13464 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13465 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13467 \begin_inset space ~
13473 There you find the following sizes:
13476 \begin_layout Standard
13490 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
13491 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
13496 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
13498 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13499 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
13501 \begin_inset space ~
13507 \begin_inset Index idx
13512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13514 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13528 for the paragraph separation.
13529 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
13540 \begin_layout Standard
13549 equal to the height,
13550 or half the height,
13551 of a line in the current font size including line spacing.
13554 \begin_layout Standard
13560 \begin_inset Index idx
13565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13567 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13581 is a variable space,
13582 set so that the space is maximal within one page.
13584 you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
13589 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second one at the bottom,
13590 because the space between them is then maximal.
13600 they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
13604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13609 s are described in section
13610 \begin_inset space ~
13614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13616 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
13626 If there are several
13631 they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
13632 You can therefore use
13636 s to center text on a page,
13637 or even place text 2/3 down a page.
13640 \begin_layout Standard
13645 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
13646 \begin_inset space ~
13650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13652 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
13660 \begin_layout Standard
13661 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13672 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of a page,
13673 the space is only added if you have also checked the option
13685 \begin_layout Subsection
13686 Paragraph Alignment
13687 \begin_inset Index idx
13692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13694 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13711 \begin_layout Standard
13712 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
13714 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13717 dialog (toolbar button
13720 arg "layout-paragraph"
13724 There are five possibilities:
13727 \begin_layout Itemize
13735 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
13741 \begin_layout Itemize
13749 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
13755 \begin_layout Itemize
13763 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
13769 \begin_layout Itemize
13777 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
13783 \begin_layout Itemize
13791 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
13797 \begin_layout Standard
13798 The default in most cases is justified alignment,
13799 in which the inter-word spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between the left and right margins.
13800 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory,
13801 and look like this:
13804 \begin_layout Standard
13806 This paragraph is right aligned,
13809 \begin_layout Standard
13811 this one is centered,
13814 \begin_layout Standard
13816 this one is left aligned.
13819 \begin_layout Subsection
13821 \begin_inset Index idx
13826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13828 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13843 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13845 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
13852 \begin_layout Standard
13853 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
13854 does the page breaks in your document,
13855 you can force a page break where you want one.
13856 Normally this will not be necessary,
13857 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
13858 is good at page breaking.
13859 Only if you use a lot of
13865 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
13868 \begin_layout Standard
13869 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished and you have checked in the preview to see if you
13873 have to change the page breaking.
13876 \begin_layout Standard
13877 There are two types of page breaks:
13878 One that ends the page without any special action.
13879 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
13881 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13882 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13884 \begin_inset space ~
13891 that is inserted via the menu
13893 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13894 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13896 \begin_inset space ~
13902 ends a page but stretches the content of the page,
13903 so that it fills out the complete page.
13904 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page on which only the last few lines are absent.
13907 \begin_layout Standard
13908 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears at the top of a page.
13911 the wrong way to do it.
13913 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables appear at the top of a page (or the bottom,
13914 or on their own page) without having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
13916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13918 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
13923 to learn more about
13930 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13934 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
13939 \begin_inset Index idx
13944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13946 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13963 \begin_layout Standard
13964 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed directly on the next page,
13965 you can also clear pages while breaking them.
13966 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything,
13967 including unprocessed floats,
13968 from the earlier part of the document are placed after it,
13969 if necessary by adding pages.
13972 \begin_layout Standard
13973 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
13975 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13976 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13978 \begin_inset space ~
13984 When you have a two-sided document like a book,
13985 you can use the menu
13987 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13988 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13990 \begin_inset space ~
13994 \begin_inset space ~
13999 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand page (odd-numbered),
14000 if necessary by adding a page.
14003 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14004 Suppressing Page Breaks
14005 \begin_inset Index idx
14010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14012 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14029 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
14036 \begin_layout Standard
14037 To discourage page break at a certain point you can use
14039 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14040 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14044 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
14047 \begin_layout Subsection
14049 \begin_inset Index idx
14054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14063 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
14070 \begin_layout Standard
14071 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks:
14072 one simply breaks the line.
14073 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
14075 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14076 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14078 \begin_inset space ~
14082 \begin_inset space ~
14090 arg "newline-insert newline"
14094 Another type that is inserted via the menu
14096 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14097 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14099 \begin_inset space ~
14103 \begin_inset space ~
14111 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
14114 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between the page margins.
14115 This is useful to avoid
14116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14123 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
14126 \begin_layout Standard
14127 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
14129 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
14130 is very good at line breaking.
14133 a number of situations where it is necessary to set a line break actively,
14135 in a poem or for an address (see sections
14136 \begin_inset space ~
14140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14142 reference "sec:Quote"
14149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14151 reference "sec:Verse"
14157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14159 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
14167 \begin_layout Subsection
14169 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14171 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
14176 \begin_inset Index idx
14181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14190 \begin_layout Standard
14192 \begin_inset CommandInset line
14203 \begin_layout Standard
14207 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14208 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14210 \begin_inset space ~
14215 you can insert horizontal lines.
14216 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline of the current text line or the paragraph.
14217 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
14220 \begin_layout Standard
14222 \begin_inset CommandInset line
14233 \begin_layout Section
14234 Characters and Symbols
14237 \begin_layout Standard
14238 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
14239 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter,
14241 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
14243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14249 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
14254 for information on how this is done.
14257 \begin_layout Standard
14258 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard,
14263 dialog via the menu
14265 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14266 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
14272 \begin_layout Standard
14273 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14282 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
14284 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
14292 \begin_layout Section
14293 Fonts and Text Styles
14294 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14296 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
14303 \begin_layout Subsection
14305 \begin_inset Index idx
14310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14312 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14329 \begin_layout Standard
14330 There are two types of fonts:
14333 \begin_layout Description
14335 \begin_inset space ~
14339 \begin_inset Index idx
14344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14346 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14360 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
14361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14365 characters) in the font.
14366 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are well suited for scaling to any requested size.
14367 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
14368 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
14369 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
14370 \begin_inset Newline newline
14373 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
14374 But to achieve a better quality,
14375 many fonts define several font sizes.
14376 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font sizes than at small ones.
14377 \begin_inset Newline newline
14393 \begin_inset space ~
14401 \begin_layout Description
14403 \begin_inset space ~
14407 \begin_inset Index idx
14412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14414 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14429 are defined by bitmap graphics from the start;
14430 so they will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
14432 they don't scale well,
14433 because in order to scale a glyph,
14434 each pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
14435 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an image manipulation program.
14436 In order to mitigate this effect,
14437 bitmap fonts are typically provided in several fixed sizes typically from around 8
14438 \begin_inset space ~
14441 pixels high up to 34
14442 \begin_inset space ~
14445 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
14446 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary to display each glyph;
14447 so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than scalable fonts.
14448 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have to be scaled by doubling pixels,
14450 \begin_inset Newline newline
14453 Bitmap fonts are named
14456 \begin_inset space ~
14461 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
14464 \begin_layout Standard
14465 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are designed for,
14466 while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
14467 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
14468 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs use scalable fonts.
14471 \begin_layout Standard
14472 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document,
14473 look at its document properties.
14476 \begin_layout Standard
14477 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards specifying text styles rather than specifying a particular font.
14479 instead of changing to an italicized version of the current font,
14480 to emphasize text you use an
14481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14489 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
14491 In \SpecialChar LyX
14493 you do things based on contexts,
14494 rather than focusing on typesetting details.
14497 \begin_layout Subsection
14500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14502 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14509 \begin_layout Standard
14512 used its own fonts.
14514 you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your operating system,
14515 but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
14517 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
14518 needs some extra information about the fonts,
14519 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
14520 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared to a word processor.
14521 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts are generally of very good quality,
14522 and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
14523 files are very portable across different machines.
14525 the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
14526 has increased a lot in the meantime;
14527 so you can find packages for many free and commercial fonts.
14529 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface (see section
14530 \begin_inset space ~
14534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14536 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
14542 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
14543 code in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
14546 \begin_layout Standard
14547 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
14548 engines that are also able directly to access fonts that are installed for your operating system,
14549 namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
14550 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14552 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
14555 you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font that is installed on your system.
14556 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
14559 \begin_layout Standard
14560 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14570 some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
14572 or other font deficiencies;
14573 so you might have to experiment.
14581 \begin_layout Subsection
14582 Document Font and Font size
14583 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14585 name "subsec:Document-Font"
14590 \begin_inset Index idx
14595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14597 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14612 \begin_inset Index idx
14617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14619 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14636 \begin_layout Standard
14637 You can set the document fonts in the
14639 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14643 \begin_inset Index idx
14648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14650 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14669 section of the dialog,
14670 you can specify which font should be used for the three different font shapes —
14675 \begin_inset space ~
14685 and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors for (some) sans
14686 \begin_inset space ~
14689 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
14692 \begin_layout Standard
14698 you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
14699 This requires that you use
14712 as the output format,
14714 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14718 \begin_inset space \space{}
14721 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
14722 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14723 installed (see section
14724 \begin_inset space ~
14728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14730 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14736 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
14738 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
14739 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
14741 \begin_inset space ~
14746 since \SpecialChar LyX
14747 cannot determine the family.
14748 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts,
14749 due to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
14752 cannot determine this in advance,
14753 so you might need to experiment.
14756 \begin_layout Standard
14757 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
14758 fonts (which is the default),
14759 the possible options for the font include
14763 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
14770 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
14771 With LyX's automatic font encoding,
14773 depending on the document language,
14774 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
14776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14782 \begin_inset space ~
14788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14795 ) or a look-alike of this font:
14797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14814 European Computer Modern
14817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14826 some classes set different default fonts.
14829 \begin_layout Standard
14835 it looks pixelated in PDF output,
14836 especially when you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
14840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14841 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
14844 \begin_inset space ~
14849 version 6 or later,
14850 because this program includes a special bitmap font renderer.
14855 To get rid of pixelated fonts,
14856 you have to use a vector font.
14857 Depending on how your document should look,
14861 \begin_layout Itemize
14865 \begin_inset space ~
14871 which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
14883 \begin_inset space ~
14888 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14889 community in order to replace
14893 as the default font.
14894 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
14895 Except for some details,
14896 where the appearance was improved,
14900 \begin_inset space ~
14913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14914 One difference is improved kerning.
14922 \begin_layout Itemize
14923 If you do not like the look of
14932 you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided,
14934 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14938 \begin_inset space ~
14944 \begin_inset space ~
14954 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
14955 \begin_inset space ~
14958 serif and typewriter fonts,
14962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14963 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
14964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14971 \begin_inset space ~
14980 for sans serif text),
14981 or different shapes of the same font,
14983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14987 \begin_inset space \space{}
14995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14999 \begin_inset space \space{}
15005 \begin_inset space ~
15013 \begin_inset space ~
15023 but you can also select your own.
15024 \begin_inset Newline newline
15027 The differences between roman,
15031 \begin_inset space ~
15040 fonts are explained in section
15041 \begin_inset space ~
15045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15047 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15053 \begin_inset Newline newline
15059 \begin_inset space ~
15064 was originally designed for newspapers.
15065 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit into the small newspaper columns.
15069 \begin_inset space ~
15074 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
15077 \begin_layout Standard
15078 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
15094 Some classes provide additional sizes.
15099 depends on the class you are using.
15100 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
15103 \begin_layout Standard
15104 Note that the font size is the
15109 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
15110 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used in footnotes,
15112 and subscripts) by this value.
15113 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
15116 \begin_inset space ~
15122 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
15123 \begin_inset space ~
15127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15129 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15137 \begin_layout Standard
15141 \begin_inset space ~
15146 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should be roman,
15148 \begin_inset space ~
15151 serif or typewriter.
15156 selection uses what is preset by the class,
15157 the other selections override this.
15168 but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
15171 \begin_layout Standard
15176 LaTeX font encoding
15178 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15184 \begin_inset Index idx
15189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15192 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15208 you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
15209 Unless you have specific reasons,
15217 \begin_layout Standard
15221 Use Old Style Figures
15225 Use True Small Caps
15228 These are extra features some fonts provide.
15231 Use Old Style Figures
15234 old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures) are used.
15235 Old style figures are the numerals (0
15236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15243 9) with ascenders and descenders,
15244 which makes them fit nicely with lowercase letters.
15247 Use True Small Caps
15249 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made of scaled capitals.
15250 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets;
15251 they generally look better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
15254 \begin_layout Standard
15257 you can add additional (comma-separated) options provided by the font package (or the
15262 if you use non-TeX fonts),
15268 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
15272 \begin_layout Standard
15277 allows users of the languages Chinese,
15279 Korean (CJK) to specify a font to display the script characters.
15283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15284 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15290 \begin_inset Index idx
15295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15298 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15312 So this has no effect for the document language
15328 \begin_layout Standard
15331 Enable micro-typographic extensions
15333 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15339 \begin_inset Index idx
15344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15347 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15365 \begin_layout Standard
15368 Disallow line breaks after dashes
15370 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
15374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15375 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
15377 if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15383 instead of ligatures (--,
15385 \begin_inset space ~
15389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15391 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
15402 \begin_layout Standard
15403 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
15407 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15416 When you choose a new font or font size,
15422 change the screen font!
15423 You will only see a difference in the printed output;
15424 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
15426 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
15428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
15433 \begin_inset space ~
15437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15439 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
15452 \begin_layout Subsection
15456 \begin_layout Standard
15457 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
15458 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document font.
15459 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
15460 fonts for your document,
15461 you can explicitly choose a math font in the dialog
15463 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15467 \begin_inset Index idx
15472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15474 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15489 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
15490 automatically selects a math font.
15491 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
15492 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
15493 's default font family
15494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15500 \begin_inset space ~
15506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15511 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the document font is available.
15514 \begin_layout Standard
15515 Note that the math font will not be used for
15519 (which is inserted with the shortcut
15525 or by the insertion of the command
15532 Also note that some math fonts are sans
15533 \begin_inset space ~
15537 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs while the math characters do not.
15539 \begin_inset space ~
15542 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
15545 \begin_inset space ~
15553 \begin_inset space ~
15558 in the document font settings.
15561 \begin_layout Standard
15562 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
15563 fonts for the document,
15564 you can only choose for math to use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
15565 font (in most cases
15566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15572 \begin_inset space ~
15578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15581 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
15582 variant of the document's class default font (in most cases
15583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15589 \begin_inset space ~
15595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15601 \begin_layout Subsection
15602 Using Different Text Styles
15603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15605 name "subsec:charstyles"
15610 \begin_inset Index idx
15615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15622 \begin_inset Index idx
15627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15636 \begin_layout Standard
15637 As we've already seen,
15639 automatically changes the style for certain paragraph environments.
15641 we will explain how the style of selected text passages can by changed.
15642 This is where we meet the concept of
15649 \begin_layout Standard
15652 supports two text styles,
15668 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15672 available with all document classes.
15674 some document classes and modules provide
15678 for specific purposes.
15679 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
15682 \begin_layout Standard
15685 allow us just a few words of what we mean by
15694 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
15699 if you wanted to emphasize a word,
15700 you selected it and chose e.
15701 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15722 encourage the use of
15734 instead (although formal markup is still possible;
15736 \begin_inset space ~
15740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15742 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15748 Rather than fiddling with
15753 they encourage the use of
15758 who are defined with regard to their function (e.
15759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15764 \begin_inset Quotes els
15768 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15773 \begin_inset Quotes els
15777 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15781 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
15783 using functional categories keeps you thinking about why you are actually marking up,
15784 if your markup is consistent and systematic,
15785 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
15786 On a more practical level,
15787 it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
15788 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names in
15793 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
15794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15800 you would have to change any single occurrence.
15801 With a semantic markup (such as
15807 you'd just need to change the definition of
15812 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15815 semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions of a document,
15816 using different markup semantics.
15819 \begin_layout Standard
15821 we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided by \SpecialChar LyX
15825 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15826 Builtin Text Styles
15827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15829 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
15836 \begin_layout Standard
15837 The two builtin text styles can be activated via the
15846 \begin_layout Standard
15852 do one of the following:
15855 \begin_layout Itemize
15856 click on the toolbar button
15865 \begin_layout Itemize
15866 use the key binding
15875 \begin_layout Itemize
15883 arg "dialog-show character"
15889 arg "dialog-show character"
15899 \begin_layout Standard
15900 This command is a toggle.
15906 style is already active,
15907 they deactivate it.
15910 \begin_layout Standard
15911 One typically uses the
15915 style for proper names.
15918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15925 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
15927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15933 \begin_layout Standard
15939 is producing text in
15944 but the definition can be changed.
15947 \begin_layout Standard
15948 A more widely used text style is the
15953 You can activate (or deactivate —
15954 it's also a toggle) the
15961 \begin_layout Itemize
15962 clicking on the toolbar button
15971 \begin_layout Itemize
15972 using the keybindings
15981 \begin_layout Itemize
15989 arg "dialog-show character"
15995 arg "dialog-show character"
16005 \begin_layout Standard
16010 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
16011 packages use a different font,
16012 and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16016 \begin_layout Standard
16017 We've been using the
16021 style all over the place in this document.
16022 Here's one more example:
16025 \begin_layout Quotation
16028 Do not overuse text styles!
16031 \begin_layout Standard
16032 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
16033 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
16034 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other,
16035 we should also avoid the common tendency to overuse text styles.
16038 \begin_layout Standard
16039 In contrast to the custom text styles,
16040 the builtin styles are represented only as font changes and integrated in the
16045 You can therefore always reset to the default font using the key binding
16056 arg "dialog-show character"
16064 arg "dialog-show character"
16070 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16072 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16074 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
16081 \begin_layout Standard
16082 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class,
16083 a module (see section
16084 \begin_inset space ~
16088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16090 reference "subsec:Modules"
16099 or local layout settings (see section
16100 \begin_inset space ~
16104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16106 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
16112 As the two builtin styles,
16117 markup for specific functions.
16124 module that provides,
16125 among other things,
16126 some custom text styles to markup linguistic levels:
16138 \begin_inset Quotes els
16142 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16148 \begin_layout Standard
16149 These styles can be found,
16153 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16159 \begin_layout Standard
16160 For the purpose of demonstration,
16161 we have loaded in this document the optional module
16165 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
16166 By example of the emphasized style,
16167 we can see the differences in look and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same):
16172 appears as normal font change,
16173 the custom text style
16174 \begin_inset Flex Emph
16177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16183 appears as an inset,
16184 with a label below that identifies its semantics.
16185 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
16187 the three others from the module we have loaded are:
16189 \begin_inset Flex Code
16192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16200 \begin_inset Flex Strong
16203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16211 \begin_inset Flex Noun
16214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16221 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate on screen their formal appearance.
16224 \begin_layout Subsection
16225 Tweaking Text with the
16230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16232 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16237 \begin_inset Index idx
16242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16251 \begin_layout Standard
16252 There are always occasions when you will need to do some formal fine-tuning;
16253 so \SpecialChar LyX
16254 gives you a way to customize the properties of text passages.
16256 an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
16258 writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts from ordinary dialog.
16261 \begin_layout Standard
16262 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module for this purpose (which is,
16264 generally the better way of handling such issues),
16265 you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak the properties of the respective text passages.
16270 comes in as a last resort.
16273 \begin_layout Standard
16274 Before we document how to tweak the text properties,
16275 we want to issue a warning yet again:
16276 Don't overuse that!
16278 \begin_inset Newline newline
16281 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
16284 \begin_layout Standard
16285 To tweak text properties,
16289 arg "dialog-show character"
16292 dialog or press the toolbar button
16295 arg "dialog-show character"
16299 There are several combo boxes in this dialog,
16300 each corresponding to a different text property that you can choose.
16301 You can choose an option for one of these properties,
16305 \begin_inset space ~
16311 which keeps the current state of that property.
16316 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
16317 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph environments all at once.
16320 \begin_layout Standard
16326 and their options (in addition to
16329 \begin_inset space ~
16341 \begin_layout Labeling
16342 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16356 The possible options are:
16360 \begin_layout Labeling
16361 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16366 This is the Roman font family.
16367 Normally a serif font.
16368 It's also the default family.
16378 \begin_layout Labeling
16379 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16383 \begin_inset space ~
16390 This is the Sans Serif font family.
16402 \begin_layout Labeling
16403 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16410 This is the Typewriter font family.
16416 arg "font-typewriter"
16424 \begin_layout Standard
16425 The general differences of these families are:
16428 \begin_layout Itemize
16433 fonts use characters with serifs.
16434 These are the small
16435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16442 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16443 The following example shows the difference:
16444 \begin_inset Newline newline
16448 \begin_inset Newline newline
16453 text without serifs
16456 \begin_inset Newline newline
16459 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16460 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16467 \begin_layout Itemize
16472 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16473 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16474 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16477 \begin_layout Itemize
16483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16491 which means every character has the same width;
16493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16510 \begin_inset Newline newline
16514 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16528 \begin_inset Note Note
16531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16532 For more on phantoms see section
16533 \begin_inset space ~
16537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16539 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16550 \begin_inset Newline newline
16557 \begin_layout Labeling
16558 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16563 This corresponds to the print weight.
16568 \begin_layout Labeling
16569 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16574 This is the Medium font series.
16575 It's also the default series.
16578 \begin_layout Labeling
16579 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16586 This is the Bold font series.
16599 \begin_layout Labeling
16600 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16605 As the name implies.
16610 \begin_layout Labeling
16611 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16616 This is the Upright font shape.
16617 It's also the default shape.
16620 \begin_layout Labeling
16621 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16632 is the Italic font shape
16638 \begin_layout Labeling
16639 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16646 This is the Slanted font shape
16648 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
16650 this is different from italic).
16653 \begin_layout Labeling
16654 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16658 \begin_inset space ~
16665 This is the Small caps font shape
16672 \begin_layout Labeling
16673 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16678 Alters the size of the font.
16679 You won't find numerical values here;
16680 all possible sizes are actually proportional to the document font size.
16682 you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
16684 but a general description of what you want to do.
16689 \begin_layout Labeling
16690 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16711 arg "font-size tiny"
16717 \begin_layout Labeling
16718 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16739 arg "font-size scriptsize"
16745 \begin_layout Labeling
16746 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16767 arg "font-size footnotesize"
16773 \begin_layout Labeling
16774 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16795 arg "font-size small"
16801 \begin_layout Labeling
16802 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16816 It's also the default size.
16820 arg "font-size normal"
16826 \begin_layout Labeling
16827 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16848 arg "font-size large"
16854 \begin_layout Labeling
16855 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16876 arg "font-size larger"
16882 \begin_layout Labeling
16883 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16904 arg "font-size largest"
16910 \begin_layout Labeling
16911 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16932 arg "font-size huge"
16938 \begin_layout Labeling
16939 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16960 arg "font-size giant"
16966 \begin_layout Labeling
16967 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16972 This increases the size by one step (for instance,
16974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16993 arg "font-size increase"
16999 \begin_layout Labeling
17000 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17005 This decreases the size by one step (for instance,
17007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17026 arg "font-size decrease"
17032 \begin_layout Standard
17038 don't go crazy with this feature.
17039 You should almost never need to change the font size.
17041 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments —
17043 This is here for fine-tuning only!
17047 \begin_layout Standard
17048 Another combo box allows to tweak
17055 \begin_layout Labeling
17056 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17061 Alters the text color.
17062 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
17068 which means that the document default color set in
17070 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17071 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17077 \begin_inset space ~
17177 \begin_inset Index idx
17182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17184 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17201 \begin_layout Labeling
17202 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17207 Here you can have text passages being underlined.
17208 Avoid using underlining if you can!
17209 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
17210 when you could not change fonts.
17211 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
17212 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
17213 because some people
17217 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
17222 \begin_layout Labeling
17223 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17228 Don't use underlining.
17231 \begin_layout Labeling
17232 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17239 This is text with Single underlining on.
17245 arg "font-underline"
17251 \begin_inset Newline newline
17257 \begin_layout Labeling
17258 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17265 This is text with Double underlining on.
17271 arg "font-underunderline"
17277 \begin_layout Labeling
17278 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17285 This is text with Wavy underlining on.
17291 arg "font-underwave"
17295 \begin_inset Newline newline
17298 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
17299 Keep antinausea pills handy.
17303 \begin_layout Labeling
17304 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17309 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
17313 \begin_layout Labeling
17314 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17319 Don't use strikethrough.
17322 \begin_layout Labeling
17323 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17330 This is text with Single strikethrough on.
17336 arg "font-strikeout"
17340 \begin_inset Newline newline
17343 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been changed in the meantime.
17346 \begin_layout Labeling
17347 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17351 \begin_inset space ~
17358 This is text with /-strikethrough on.
17361 \begin_inset Newline newline
17364 This is used to make text hardly readable.
17368 \begin_layout Standard
17369 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
17372 \begin_layout Labeling
17373 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17378 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
17379 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
17380 workarea in blue to indicate the change.
17381 \begin_inset Newline newline
17384 If you have for example,
17385 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
17387 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
17388 When using the spell checking (see section
17389 \begin_inset space ~
17393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17395 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
17400 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
17401 \begin_inset Newline newline
17404 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
17407 Exclude from Spellchecking
17410 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
17413 \begin_layout Standard
17414 In addition to all the formal markup described above,
17415 the dialog also provides you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
17416 \begin_inset space ~
17420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17422 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
17434 \begin_layout Itemize
17442 This is text with emphasize on
17447 \begin_layout Itemize
17455 This is text with Noun on.
17458 \begin_layout Standard
17459 So you have a huge number of combinations to select from.
17460 Once you have applied a text property via the
17463 arg "dialog-show character"
17469 arg "dialog-show character"
17473 the settings are temporarily saved.
17474 You can activate the last applied properties by using the toolbar button
17477 arg "textstyle-apply"
17481 The button lets you apply those even when the dialog isn't visible.
17482 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again,
17483 a press on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
17484 20) most recently applied settings,
17485 from which you can select one.
17488 \begin_layout Standard
17489 To completely reset the text properties of a selection to the default,
17500 from the menu of the toolbar button
17503 arg "textstyle-apply"
17510 \begin_layout Standard
17511 We conclude this section with the same warning once again:
17512 Do not overuse the fonts!
17514 more often than not,
17515 a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
17518 \begin_layout Section
17519 Printing and Previewing
17522 \begin_layout Subsection
17526 \begin_layout Standard
17527 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation using \SpecialChar LyX
17529 you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
17530 Before we tell you that,
17531 we want to give you a quick explanation of what goes on behind-the-scenes.
17532 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
17534 Additional Features
17539 \begin_layout Standard
17541 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
17544 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
17545 typesetting system,
17546 but to prevent confusion,
17547 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17550 is what you use to do your actual writing.
17553 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17554 to turn your writing into printable output.
17555 This happens in two stages:
17558 \begin_layout Enumerate
17561 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
17563 generating a file with the extension,
17565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17579 \begin_layout Enumerate
17582 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17583 to use the commands in the
17587 file to produce printable output.
17590 \begin_layout Subsection
17591 Output file formats
17592 \begin_inset Index idx
17597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17606 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17613 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17615 \begin_inset Index idx
17620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17622 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17639 \begin_layout Standard
17640 This file type has the extension
17641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17653 It contains your document as plain text in UTF-8 encoding.
17656 \begin_layout Standard
17657 You can export your document to plain text with the menu
17659 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17660 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17662 \begin_inset space ~
17669 this will not export any externally generated material such as a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17670 bibliography (section
17671 \begin_inset space ~
17675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17677 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17683 If your document includes such material,
17686 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17687 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17689 \begin_inset space ~
17693 \begin_inset space ~
17697 \begin_inset space ~
17705 \begin_inset space ~
17709 \begin_inset space ~
17715 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to plain text.
17718 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17721 \begin_inset Index idx
17726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17728 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17746 \begin_layout Standard
17747 This file type has the extension
17748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17759 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17760 program to process your document.
17761 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17763 you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17764 -Errors or to process it manually with console commands.
17765 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17766 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17767 's temporary directory whenever you view or export your document.
17770 \begin_layout Standard
17771 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17772 -file using the menu
17774 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17775 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17779 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17780 export variants are explained in section
17781 \begin_inset space ~
17785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17787 reference "subsec:Export"
17795 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17797 \begin_inset Index idx
17802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17804 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17821 \begin_layout Standard
17822 This file type has the extension
17823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17844 because it is completely portable;
17845 you can move them from one machine to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17846 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17850 \begin_layout Standard
17851 DVI files do not contain images,
17852 they only link to them.
17853 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17854 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make them visible when you scroll the DVI,
17855 this can slow down your computer when you view the DVI.
17856 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17859 \begin_layout Standard
17860 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17862 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17863 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17868 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17869 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17871 \begin_inset space ~
17877 The latter option uses the program
17879 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17885 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17888 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
17889 \begin_inset space ~
17893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17895 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17901 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17902 is still a work in progress,
17903 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
17907 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17909 \begin_inset Index idx
17914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17916 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17933 \begin_layout Standard
17934 This file type has the extension
17935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17947 PostScript was developed by the company
17951 as a printer language.
17952 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the file.
17953 PostScript can be seen as a
17954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17957 programming language
17958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17962 you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17967 If you are interested in learning more about this,
17968 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17974 \begin_inset Index idx
17979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17982 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18001 As a result of this,
18002 the files are often bigger than PDFs.
18005 \begin_layout Standard
18006 PostScript can only contain images in the format
18007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18010 Encapsulated PostScript
18011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18028 As \SpecialChar LyX
18029 allows you to use any known image format in your document,
18030 it has to convert them in the background to EPS.
18034 \begin_inset space ~
18037 images in your document,
18040 \begin_inset space ~
18043 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
18044 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
18046 So if you plan to use PostScript,
18047 you can insert your images directly as EPS to avoid this problem.
18050 \begin_layout Standard
18051 You can export to PostScript using the menu
18053 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18054 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18060 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18062 \begin_inset Index idx
18067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18069 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18084 \begin_inset Index idx
18089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18098 \begin_layout Standard
18099 This file type has the extension
18100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18116 Portable Document Format
18117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18124 was derived from PostScript.
18125 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
18127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18135 it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output looks exactly the same.
18138 \begin_layout Standard
18139 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
18140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18143 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18176 Portable Network Graphics
18177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18194 You can also use any other image format,
18195 because \SpecialChar LyX
18196 converts them in the background to one of these formats.
18197 But as described in the section about PostScript,
18198 the image conversion will slow down your workflow.
18199 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
18202 \begin_layout Standard
18203 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
18205 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18211 \begin_layout Description
18213 \begin_inset space ~
18216 (pdflatex) This uses the program
18220 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18223 \begin_layout Description
18225 \begin_inset space ~
18232 ) This uses the program
18234 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18237 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18240 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18249 that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
18250 \begin_inset space ~
18254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18256 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18262 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18263 is still a work in progress,
18264 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
18268 \begin_layout Description
18270 \begin_inset space ~
18277 ) This uses the program
18282 that converts your file directly to PDF.
18288 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
18289 \begin_inset space ~
18293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18295 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18301 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts,
18303 vertically written Japanese.
18306 \begin_layout Description
18308 \begin_inset space ~
18311 (cropped) This is the same as
18314 \begin_inset space ~
18319 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
18320 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
18321 to generate good-looking formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
18324 \begin_layout Description
18326 \begin_inset space ~
18329 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
18333 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to PDF.
18336 \begin_layout Description
18338 \begin_inset space ~
18341 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
18345 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
18346 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
18350 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
18351 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
18354 \begin_layout Standard
18358 \begin_inset space ~
18367 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions,
18370 and works without problems.
18371 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
18372 or specific OpenType fonts,
18373 you might want to try out
18376 \begin_inset space ~
18384 \begin_inset space ~
18390 bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature as
18397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18399 \begin_inset Index idx
18404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18406 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18421 \begin_inset Index idx
18426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18435 \begin_layout Standard
18436 This file type has the extension
18437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18449 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
18450 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
18451 When \SpecialChar LyX
18453 it also generates corresponding images in formats suitable for the purpose.
18454 For the math output you can choose in the menu
18456 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18457 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18460 between different formats,
18461 which are described in section
18463 Math Output in XHTML
18468 \begin_inset space ~
18476 \begin_layout Standard
18477 XHTML output remains
18478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18486 and not all \SpecialChar LyX
18487 features are supported yet.
18491 and the World Wide Web
18496 Additional Features
18499 for more information.
18502 \begin_layout Standard
18503 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
18505 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18506 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18512 \begin_layout Subsection
18514 \begin_inset Index idx
18519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18521 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18538 \begin_layout Standard
18539 To get a look at the final version of your document,
18540 with all of the page breaks in place,
18541 the footnotes correctly numbered,
18551 or use the toolbar button
18558 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default output format,
18559 which is globally set in the preferences (see section
18560 \begin_inset space ~
18564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18566 reference "sec:File-Formats"
18571 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings (see section
18572 \begin_inset space ~
18576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18578 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
18584 Further output formats can be selected via
18586 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18587 View (Other Formats)
18589 or the toolbar button
18598 \begin_layout Standard
18599 If you have changed your document,
18600 you can refresh the output in the same viewer window using the menu
18602 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18607 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18608 Update (Other Formats)
18614 \begin_layout Standard
18615 When you preview a file,
18616 the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
18617 's temporary directory.
18618 To have a real output,
18619 export your document.
18622 \begin_layout Section
18623 A few Words about Typography
18624 \begin_inset Index idx
18629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18638 \begin_layout Subsection
18640 Dashes and Minus Signs
18641 \begin_inset Index idx
18646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18653 \begin_inset Index idx
18658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18667 \begin_layout Standard
18668 In \SpecialChar LyX
18671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18682 symbol comes in four variants:
18703 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18709 \begin_layout Standard
18710 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18720 height_special "totalheight"
18725 backgroundcolor "none"
18728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18729 \begin_inset Tabular
18730 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18731 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18732 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18733 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18734 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18735 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18736 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18764 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18765 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18804 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18805 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18827 system key combination
18831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18833 the en dash is entered with
18836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18845 and the em dash with
18848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18861 is the Mac label for the right
18871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18884 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18885 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18908 system key combination or
18909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18923 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18936 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18975 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18981 \begin_layout Standard
18982 Dashes can also be inserted with
18984 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18986 \begin_inset space ~
18989 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18997 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash and 2014 for the en dash).
19000 \begin_layout Standard
19001 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign,
19002 which appears in math mode and has a length of its own.
19003 Here are some examples:
19006 \begin_layout Enumerate
19007 line- and page-breaks
19008 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19018 \begin_layout Enumerate
19021 \begin_inset space ~
19025 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19035 \begin_layout Enumerate
19036 The em dash is used without spaces:
19039 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19049 \begin_layout Enumerate
19050 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
19054 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19064 \begin_layout Standard
19066 \begin_inset CommandInset href
19068 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
19069 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
19077 \begin_layout Subsection
19078 Dashes and Line Breaks
19079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19081 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
19088 \begin_layout Standard
19089 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use case and locale,
19091 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19097 \begin_layout Itemize
19099 line breaks are generally allowed after the dash,
19100 but no line break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
19103 \begin_layout Itemize
19105 dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start a new line.
19108 \begin_layout Itemize
19109 In French and Spanish,
19110 dashes around parenthetical statements are treated similar to brackets:
19111 line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
19114 \begin_layout Standard
19116 dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
19117 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19128 allows line breaks after hyphens and these en-dashes and em-dashes.
19131 \begin_layout Enumerate
19132 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
19133 \begin_inset space ~
19136 – common in British English and generally recommended by
19138 The Elements of Typographic Style
19141 \begin_inset space ~
19144 – can be prevented using non-breaking spaces.
19147 \begin_layout Enumerate
19148 Unwanted line breaks
19152 dashes must be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
19156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19159 Prevent Hyphenation
19164 \begin_inset space ~
19180 in \SpecialChar TeX
19182 a non-breaking space does not suffice.
19187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19188 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not in the document language.
19189 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French and Spanish.
19198 \begin_layout Itemize
19200 \begin_inset space ~
19204 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19214 height_special "totalheight"
19219 backgroundcolor "none"
19222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19231 \begin_layout Itemize
19233 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19243 height_special "totalheight"
19248 backgroundcolor "none"
19251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19253 \begin_inset space ~
19261 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19262 \begin_inset space ~
19265 – sont très utiles.
19268 \begin_layout Itemize
19273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19283 un inciso con rayas—
19288 \begin_layout Standard
19289 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
19290 \begin_inset space ~
19293 – in contrast to an overfull line
19294 \begin_inset space ~
19297 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19301 \begin_layout Standard
19302 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes,
19303 you can select the option
19305 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19306 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19307 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19308 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19313 \begin_layout Enumerate
19314 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
19315 They can be prevented using non-breaking spaces (without need for a makebox or \SpecialChar TeX
19321 \begin_layout Itemize
19323 \begin_inset space ~
19326 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19327 \begin_inset space ~
19330 – sont très utiles.
19334 \begin_layout Enumerate
19335 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
19336 \begin_inset Newline newline
19341 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19342 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19344 \begin_inset space ~
19348 \begin_inset space ~
19357 \begin_layout Itemize
19358 Em-dashes without spaces—
19359 \SpecialChar allowbreak
19360 common in American English—
19361 \SpecialChar allowbreak
19362 should be followed by a line break opportunity.
19365 \begin_layout Standard
19366 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
19367 \begin_inset space ~
19371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19373 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19385 \begin_layout Enumerate
19388 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em or en dashes (see section
19389 \begin_inset space ~
19393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19395 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19406 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19407 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
19410 \begin_layout Standard
19411 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
19413 \begin_inset space ~
19417 consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
19419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19426 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
19434 \begin_layout Standard
19435 Since \SpecialChar LyX
19437 \begin_inset space ~
19441 consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19442 in a way that prevents ligation to dashes.
19444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19451 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters (except in
19456 typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately after the input (unless the current text font is
19464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19465 The behavior was changed since
19466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19484 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output as non-breakable dashes.
19485 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
19493 \begin_layout Standard
19496 \begin_inset space ~
19504 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
19506 \begin_inset space ~
19509 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
19512 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19513 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19514 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19515 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19517 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
19522 If you used both literal and
19523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19530 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
19532 \begin_inset space ~
19536 you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
19539 \begin_layout Subsection
19541 \begin_inset Index idx
19546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19555 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
19562 \begin_layout Standard
19563 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
19564 but automatically in the output.
19565 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19571 \begin_inset Index idx
19576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19579 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19593 following the rules of the document language.
19595 does not hyphenate text in the
19599 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
19602 \begin_layout Standard
19604 hyphenates almost perfectly;
19605 it only has problems with text in the
19609 font and with unusual constructs,
19611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19619 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
19620 cannot break a word correctly,
19621 you can set hyphenation points manually.
19622 This is done with the menu
19624 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19625 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19627 \begin_inset space ~
19633 Note that adding hyphenation points disables the default ones:
19634 The word will no longer break at the places it previously would have.
19637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19644 that are common in word processors,
19645 these added hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19647 If no hyphenation is necessary or the automatic hyphenation is disabled,
19652 \begin_layout Standard
19653 If there is a word you use often that \SpecialChar LaTeX
19654 does not hyphenate correctly,
19655 you can tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
19656 how to hyphenate it by adding the command
19657 \begin_inset Flex Code
19660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19663 hyphenation{<patterns>}
19668 to the preamble which takes as its argument one or more words with their hyphenation points marked by a hyphen,
19670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19675 \begin_inset Flex Code
19678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19681 hyphenation{dis-quo-ta-tion dis-quo-ta-tions}
19686 You can also use this to prevent hyphenation of a word,
19688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19693 \begin_inset Flex Code
19696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19699 hyphenation{unbroken}
19705 If there are a lot of these hyphenation exceptions,
19706 you can collect them in a single file (say,
19708 \begin_inset Flex Code
19711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19717 ) and then import the file via:
19719 \begin_inset Flex Code
19722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19725 usepackage{myhyphens}
19731 Make sure to put the file somewhere \SpecialChar LaTeX
19732 can find it (see the section
19734 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
19744 \begin_layout Standard
19746 \begin_inset Flex Code
19749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19752 hyphenation{<patterns>}
19757 applies to the language that is current when the command is issued (in the preamble,
19758 this is usually the main language of the document).
19759 If you want to define patterns for specific languages without knowing which language is in effect,
19760 the language packages
19768 provide specific variants of the command:
19771 \begin_layout Itemize
19778 \begin_inset Flex Code
19781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19784 babelhyphenation[<language 1>,
19795 \begin_layout Itemize
19802 \begin_inset Flex Code
19805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19808 pghyphenation[<language options>]{<language>}{<patterns>}
19816 \begin_layout Standard
19818 depending on which language package you are using:
19821 \begin_layout Itemize
19822 \begin_inset Flex Code
19825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19828 babelhyphenation[german,ngerman,austrian,naustrian,swissgerman,
19829 \begin_inset Newline newline
19832 nswissgerman]{Ma-de}
19840 \begin_layout Itemize
19841 \begin_inset Flex Code
19844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19847 pghyphenation{german}{Ma-de}
19855 \begin_layout Standard
19856 in order to define the hyphenation points for all German varieties,
19860 \begin_layout Itemize
19861 \begin_inset Flex Code
19864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19867 babelhyphenation[naustrian]{Ma-de}
19875 \begin_layout Itemize
19876 \begin_inset Flex Code
19879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19882 pghyphenation[variant=austrian]{german}{Ma-de}
19890 \begin_layout Standard
19891 in order to define them only for the Austrian variety of German.
19894 \begin_layout Standard
19895 These commands only work after the language package has been loaded,
19896 which is usually after the user preamble.
19897 So it is advised that you embrace them in
19898 \begin_inset Flex Code
19901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19904 AtBeginDocument{\SpecialChar ldots
19911 which causes them to be issued at the end of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19915 \begin_layout Standard
19916 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
19917 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document in the form
19918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19927 would then see the hyphen
19928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19935 as a line break possibility.
19936 A line break at this point would look ugly.
19937 To prevent the shortcut from being broken,
19938 you can use a non-breaking hyphen (
19940 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19941 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
19942 Non-Breaking Hyphen
19944 ) or put it into a makebox as described in the section
19946 Prevent Hyphenation
19951 \begin_inset space ~
19959 \begin_layout Subsection
19961 \begin_inset Index idx
19966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19975 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19976 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19977 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19979 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19986 \begin_layout Standard
19987 When \SpecialChar LyX
19988 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19989 to generate the final version of your document,
19991 automatically distinguishes between words,
19996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19999 appropriate amount of space.
20000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20003 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and the next word.
20004 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word gets after another word.
20007 \begin_layout Standard
20009 the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does not work in all cases.
20011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20022 is at the end of a lowercase letter,
20023 it's the end of a sentence;
20024 if it's at the end of a capitalized letter,
20025 it's an abbreviation.
20028 \begin_layout Standard
20029 Here are some examples of
20033 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
20036 \begin_layout Itemize
20041 \begin_layout Itemize
20046 \begin_layout Standard
20047 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
20050 \begin_layout Itemize
20052 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20056 this is too much space!
20059 \begin_layout Itemize
20064 \begin_layout Standard
20065 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
20068 \begin_layout Standard
20069 To fix this problem,
20070 use one of the following:
20073 \begin_layout Enumerate
20077 \begin_inset space ~
20082 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
20083 \begin_inset space ~
20087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20089 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
20095 \begin_inset Index idx
20100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20102 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20119 \begin_layout Enumerate
20123 \begin_inset space ~
20128 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
20129 \begin_inset space ~
20133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20135 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
20141 \begin_inset Index idx
20146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20148 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20165 \begin_layout Enumerate
20169 \begin_inset space ~
20173 \begin_inset space ~
20177 \begin_inset space ~
20184 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20186 \begin_inset space ~
20191 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
20192 This function is also bound to
20195 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
20201 \begin_layout Standard
20202 With the corrections,
20203 our earlier examples look like this:
20206 \begin_layout Itemize
20208 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20212 \begin_inset space \space{}
20215 this is too much space!
20218 \begin_layout Itemize
20219 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
20223 \begin_layout Standard
20224 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
20225 If your language is such a language,
20226 you don't need to worry,
20227 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
20228 will take care of this.
20231 \begin_layout Standard
20232 For those that do need to bother,
20233 there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
20237 \begin_inset space ~
20243 feature described in the section
20245 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
20250 Additional Features
20255 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20257 \begin_inset Index idx
20262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20264 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20279 \begin_inset Index idx
20284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20286 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
20289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20303 \begin_layout Standard
20305 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
20307 it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted text,
20308 and use a closing mark at the end.
20311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20319 The keyboard character,
20325 generates this automatically.
20328 \begin_layout Standard
20329 You can specify what character the
20333 key produces by using the submenu
20339 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20343 \begin_inset Index idx
20348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20350 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20364 dialog and switching the
20368 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
20369 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
20371 \begin_inset space ~
20377 \begin_layout Labeling
20378 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20390 \begin_inset space ~
20394 \begin_inset space ~
20398 \begin_inset Quotes els
20402 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20416 \begin_inset Quotes els
20420 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20423 quotation marks (as common,
20425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20432 \begin_layout Labeling
20433 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20436 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20440 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20444 \begin_inset space ~
20448 \begin_inset space ~
20452 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20456 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20462 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20466 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20470 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20474 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20477 quotation marks (as common,
20479 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20486 \begin_layout Labeling
20487 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20490 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20494 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20498 \begin_inset space ~
20502 \begin_inset space ~
20506 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20510 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20516 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20520 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20524 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20528 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20531 quotation marks (as common,
20533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20540 \begin_layout Labeling
20541 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20544 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20548 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20552 \begin_inset space ~
20556 \begin_inset space ~
20560 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20564 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20570 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20574 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20578 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20582 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20585 quotation marks (as common,
20587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20594 \begin_layout Labeling
20595 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20598 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20602 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20606 \begin_inset space ~
20610 \begin_inset space ~
20614 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20618 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20624 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20628 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20632 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20636 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20639 quotation marks (as common,
20641 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20648 \begin_layout Labeling
20649 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20652 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20656 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20660 \begin_inset space ~
20664 \begin_inset space ~
20668 \begin_inset Quotes als
20672 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20678 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20682 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20686 \begin_inset Quotes als
20690 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20693 quotation marks (as common,
20695 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20702 \begin_layout Labeling
20703 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20706 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20710 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20714 \begin_inset space ~
20718 \begin_inset space ~
20722 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20726 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20732 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20736 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20740 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20744 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20747 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
20750 \begin_layout Labeling
20751 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20754 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20758 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20762 \begin_inset space ~
20766 \begin_inset space ~
20770 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20774 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20780 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20784 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20788 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20792 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20795 quotation marks (as common,
20797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20804 \begin_layout Labeling
20805 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20808 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20812 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20816 \begin_inset space ~
20820 \begin_inset space ~
20824 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20828 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20834 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20838 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20842 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20846 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20849 quotation marks (as common,
20851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20858 \begin_layout Labeling
20859 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20862 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20866 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20870 \begin_inset space ~
20874 \begin_inset space ~
20878 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20882 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20888 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20892 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20896 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20900 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20903 quotation marks (another style common in France)
20907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20908 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
20909 since these look identical to the inner marks.
20910 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where the inner marks differ).
20918 \begin_layout Labeling
20919 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20922 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20926 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20930 \begin_inset space ~
20934 \begin_inset space ~
20938 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20942 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20948 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20952 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20956 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20960 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20963 quotation marks (as common,
20965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20972 \begin_layout Labeling
20973 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20976 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20980 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20984 \begin_inset space ~
20988 \begin_inset space ~
20992 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20996 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
21002 \begin_inset Quotes wld
21006 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
21010 \begin_inset Quotes wls
21014 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
21017 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
21020 \begin_layout Labeling
21021 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21024 \begin_inset Quotes pld
21028 \begin_inset Quotes prd
21032 \begin_inset space ~
21036 \begin_inset space ~
21040 \begin_inset Quotes ald
21044 \begin_inset Quotes ard
21052 \begin_inset Quotes pld
21060 \begin_inset Quotes prd
21068 \begin_inset Quotes ald
21076 \begin_inset Quotes ard
21081 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
21084 \begin_layout Labeling
21085 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21086 \begin_inset Quotes jld
21094 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
21100 \begin_inset space ~
21104 \begin_inset space ~
21110 \begin_inset Quotes jls
21118 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
21122 \begin_inset Quotes jld
21126 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
21130 \begin_inset Quotes jls
21134 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
21137 quotation marks (as common,
21139 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21148 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21150 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
21154 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
21162 \begin_layout Labeling
21163 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21164 \begin_inset Quotes kld
21172 \begin_inset Quotes krd
21178 \begin_inset space ~
21182 \begin_inset space ~
21188 \begin_inset Quotes kls
21196 \begin_inset Quotes krs
21200 \begin_inset Quotes kld
21204 \begin_inset Quotes krd
21208 \begin_inset Quotes kls
21212 \begin_inset Quotes krs
21215 quotation marks (as common,
21217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21221 in North Korea and China)
21222 \begin_inset script superscript
21224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21227 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
21243 \begin_layout Labeling
21244 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21247 \begin_inset Quotes dld
21251 \begin_inset Quotes drd
21255 \begin_inset space ~
21259 \begin_inset space ~
21263 \begin_inset Quotes dls
21267 \begin_inset Quotes drs
21273 \begin_inset Quotes dld
21279 \begin_inset Quotes drd
21285 \begin_inset Quotes dls
21291 \begin_inset Quotes drs
21296 quotation marks (as common in Israel)
21299 \begin_layout Standard
21300 Inner quotation marks
21304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21305 In many writing cultures,
21306 these are single quotation marks.
21307 But as the British and French styles show,
21308 this is not necessarily the case (and specifically the British style shows that
21309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21316 does not necessarily mean
21317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21325 This is why we call them
21326 \begin_inset Quotes els
21330 \begin_inset Quotes ers
21334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21346 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages,
21348 \begin_inset Quotes els
21352 \begin_inset Quotes ers
21355 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
21358 arg "quote-insert inner"
21363 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21369 \begin_layout Standard
21371 the quotation mark styles are persistent.
21373 a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when it was inserted,
21374 even if the document-wide style changes.
21375 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
21376 If you check the setting
21378 Use dynamic quotation marks
21382 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21383 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21388 special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
21389 they appear in a special color).
21390 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
21391 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in one step (e.
21392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21396 if your publisher requests a different style).
21399 \begin_layout Standard
21400 Individual quotation marks (i.
21401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21405 their level [inner,
21409 and style) can be easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a mark.
21412 \begin_layout Subsection
21414 \begin_inset Index idx
21419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21421 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21436 \begin_inset Index idx
21441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21443 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
21446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21460 name "subsec:Ligatures"
21467 \begin_layout Standard
21468 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and print them as single characters.
21469 These groups are known as
21474 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
21475 knows about ligatures,
21476 your documents will contain them too in the output.
21477 Here are the standard ligatures:
21480 \begin_layout Itemize
21484 \begin_layout Itemize
21488 \begin_layout Itemize
21492 \begin_layout Itemize
21496 \begin_layout Itemize
21500 \begin_layout Standard
21501 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
21504 \begin_layout Standard
21506 you don't want a ligature in a word.
21507 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
21509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21516 it looks really weird in compound words,
21518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21533 To break a ligature,
21536 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21537 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21539 \begin_inset space ~
21546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21557 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21574 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21582 \begin_layout Subsection
21584 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
21586 \begin_inset Index idx
21591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21594 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21611 \begin_layout Standard
21614 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21615 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
21620 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
21623 \begin_layout Description
21625 The name of the game.
21628 \begin_layout Description
21630 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
21634 \begin_layout Description
21636 The \SpecialChar TeX
21637 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
21641 \begin_layout Description
21642 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
21643 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21647 \begin_layout Standard
21648 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21654 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
21658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21662 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
21663 world to give programs geek version numbers.
21664 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
21665 converges to the number
21666 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
21670 The actual version is
21671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21680 the previous one was
21681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21692 \begin_layout Subsection
21694 \begin_inset Index idx
21699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21701 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21718 \begin_layout Standard
21719 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal space between two words.
21720 As you can see in the example below,
21721 it looks better when the space is smaller.
21723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21730 for units use the menu
21732 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21733 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21735 \begin_inset space ~
21743 arg "space-insert thin"
21749 \begin_layout Standard
21750 Here is an example to show the differences:
21753 \begin_layout Standard
21754 \begin_inset Tabular
21755 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
21756 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21757 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21758 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21765 \begin_inset space ~
21769 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21781 space between number and unit
21788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21797 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21809 half space between number and unit
21822 \begin_layout Subsection
21824 \begin_inset Index idx
21829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21831 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21848 \begin_layout Standard
21849 In the early days of word processors,
21850 page breaks went wherever the page happened to end.
21851 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
21852 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom of the page,
21853 the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page,
21854 or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
21855 These bits of text became known as
21866 \begin_layout Standard
21869 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
21870 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
21871 But what about widows and orphans,
21872 where the page breaks leave one line of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page?
21873 There are rules built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
21874 governing page breaks,
21875 and some of those rules are there specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
21876 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them,
21877 you can add the commands
21878 \begin_inset Newline newline
21886 \begin_inset Newline newline
21894 \begin_inset Newline newline
21897 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21898 preamble of your document to avoid them.
21899 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
21901 \begin_inset space ~
21905 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21907 key "latexcompanion"
21913 \begin_inset space ~
21917 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21924 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21925 's page break mechanism.
21928 \begin_layout Chapter
21932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21934 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
21941 \begin_layout Standard
21942 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
21945 \begin_inset space ~
21951 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
21954 \begin_layout Section
21956 \begin_inset Index idx
21961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21977 \begin_layout Standard
21979 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
21982 \begin_layout Description
21985 \begin_inset space ~
21988 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
21989 \begin_inset Newline newline
21993 \begin_inset Note Note
21996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21997 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
22005 \begin_layout Description
22006 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
22007 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
22010 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
22011 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
22013 \begin_inset space ~
22019 \begin_inset Newline newline
22023 \begin_inset Note Comment
22026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22027 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
22036 \begin_layout Description
22038 \begin_inset space ~
22041 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can set in the document settings under
22043 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
22045 \begin_inset space ~
22051 \begin_inset Newline newline
22055 \begin_inset Newline newline
22059 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22068 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
22069 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
22074 of a comment that appears in the output.
22080 \begin_inset Newline newline
22084 \begin_inset Newline newline
22087 As you can see in the example,
22088 greyed out notes can have footnotes.
22091 \begin_layout Standard
22092 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
22100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22104 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
22107 \begin_layout Section
22109 \begin_inset Index idx
22114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22121 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22123 name "sec:Footnotes"
22130 \begin_layout Standard
22132 uses boxes to display footnotes:
22133 When you insert a footnote using the menu
22135 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22138 or the toolbar button
22141 arg "footnote-insert"
22155 \begin_inset Graphics
22156 filename clipart/footnote.png
22165 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
22166 's representation of your footnote.
22176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22200 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
22201 Clicking on the box label again will close
22214 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote,
22215 simply highlight it and click on the footnote
22230 \begin_layout Standard
22231 Here is an example footnote:
22239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22240 To close a footnote,
22241 click on the footnote box label.
22249 \begin_layout Standard
22250 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text position where the footnote box is placed.
22251 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
22252 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
22253 according to the document class.
22255 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme,
22256 but you can get other schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22262 ey are described in the
22265 \begin_inset space ~
22273 \begin_layout Section
22275 \begin_inset Index idx
22280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22287 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22289 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
22296 \begin_layout Standard
22297 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
22299 When you insert a margin note via the menu
22301 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22303 \begin_inset space ~
22308 or the toolbar button
22311 arg "marginalnote-insert"
22331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22338 appearing within your text.
22339 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
22340 's representation of your margin
22349 \begin_layout Standard
22350 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
22354 \begin_inset Marginal
22357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22359 This is a marginal note.
22367 \begin_layout Standard
22368 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
22369 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even pages,
22370 right on odd pages.
22373 \begin_layout Standard
22374 For further information about marginal notes see the section
22377 \begin_inset space ~
22385 \begin_inset space ~
22393 \begin_layout Section
22394 Graphics and Images
22395 \begin_inset Index idx
22400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22407 \begin_inset Index idx
22412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22421 name "sec:Graphics"
22428 \begin_layout Standard
22429 To insert an image in your document,
22430 place the cursor at the text position you want and click on the toolbar icon
22433 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22438 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22442 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
22445 \begin_layout Standard
22446 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
22451 tab allows you to choose your image file.
22452 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling factor.
22453 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
22454 \begin_inset space ~
22458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22460 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
22468 \begin_layout Standard
22473 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width of the image in the output.
22474 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
22477 \begin_inset space ~
22481 \begin_inset space ~
22490 \begin_inset space ~
22494 \begin_inset space ~
22498 \begin_inset space ~
22503 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
22504 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore the tab
22511 \begin_layout Standard
22515 \begin_inset space ~
22519 \begin_inset space ~
22524 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
22525 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
22527 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
22532 \begin_inset space ~
22537 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output,
22538 only a frame with the image size is printed.
22541 \begin_layout Standard
22542 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
22543 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are in the text.
22544 This is an example image within a separate,
22545 horizontally centered paragraph:
22548 \begin_layout Standard
22550 \begin_inset Graphics
22551 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
22559 \begin_layout Standard
22560 If you need image captions or want to reference images,
22561 you have to put the image into a float,
22563 \begin_inset space ~
22567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22569 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22577 \begin_layout Subsection
22579 \begin_inset Index idx
22584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22586 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22603 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
22610 \begin_layout Standard
22611 You can insert images
22612 \change_inserted 5863208 1701369912
22617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22619 \change_inserted 5863208 1701371417
22620 Apart from static images specific scripts generating images can be used as well.
22621 For example one can use Gnuplot script (files with
22622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22645 extension) instead of image filename.
22647 \change_inserted -1162675398 1718386882
22648 Gnuplot scripts can also be included as external material.
22649 Labels and numbers are then typeset in document fonts,
22650 and LaTeX math used in the Gnuplot script is rendered.
22652 \begin_inset CommandInset href
22654 name "Gnuplot in LyX wiki page"
22655 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Tools/GnuplotInLyX"
22660 for more information about installing the template for Gnuplot scripts as external material.
22669 in any known file format.
22670 But as we explained in section
22671 \begin_inset space ~
22675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22677 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22683 every output document format allows only a few image formats.
22685 therefore uses the program
22689 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
22690 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
22691 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
22692 \begin_inset space ~
22696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22698 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22706 \begin_layout Standard
22707 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
22710 \begin_layout Description
22712 \begin_inset space ~
22715 images consist of pixel values,
22716 often in a compressed form.
22717 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
22718 Well-known bitmap image formats are
22719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22722 Graphics Interchange Format
22723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22740 \begin_inset Index idx
22745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22747 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22766 Portable Network Graphics
22767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22784 \begin_inset Index idx
22789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22791 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22810 Joint Photographic Experts Group
22811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22840 \begin_inset Index idx
22845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22847 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22864 \begin_layout Description
22866 \begin_inset space ~
22869 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without data loss.
22870 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations,
22871 because presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
22872 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
22873 \begin_inset Newline newline
22876 Scalable image formats can be
22877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22880 Scalable Vector Graphics
22881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22898 \begin_inset Index idx
22903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22905 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22924 Encapsulated PostScript
22925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22942 \begin_inset Index idx
22947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22949 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22968 Portable Document Format
22969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22986 \begin_inset Index idx
22991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23007 because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the result will not be scalable.
23008 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original image.
23012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23013 In the case of PDF,
23014 the original image is additionally compressed.
23022 \begin_layout Standard
23023 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one,
23031 \begin_layout Subsection
23032 Grouping of Image Settings
23033 \begin_inset Index idx
23038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23040 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23057 \begin_layout Standard
23058 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing group.
23059 Images within such a group share their settings,
23060 so adjusting one image of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in the same way.
23061 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the need to manually change each of them.
23064 \begin_layout Standard
23065 A new group can be set by pressing the button
23068 \begin_inset space ~
23072 \begin_inset space ~
23084 \begin_inset space ~
23088 \begin_inset space ~
23094 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image and checking the name of the desired group.
23097 \begin_layout Section
23099 \begin_inset Index idx
23104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23111 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23120 \begin_layout Standard
23121 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
23124 arg "tabular-insert"
23129 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23133 A dialog will appear,
23134 asking you for the number of rows and columns,
23135 and you can select a specific (border) style.
23136 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated from the rest of the table.
23137 This separation appears due to a double line:
23138 The cells of the first row have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above them.
23139 Here is an example table:
23142 \begin_layout Standard
23144 \begin_inset Tabular
23145 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
23146 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23147 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23148 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23149 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
23150 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23346 \begin_layout Standard
23347 This corresponds to the
23348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23355 table style listed in the style selection.
23358 \begin_layout Standard
23359 Other available styles include:
23362 \begin_layout Itemize
23364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23371 which looks line the above table,
23372 but without the first row being separated via double line,
23375 \begin_layout Itemize
23376 a border-less table with no lines at all,
23379 \begin_layout Itemize
23381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23388 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and bold top/bottom lines (see
23398 It is also possible to have an horizontal (thin) Footline above the last line.
23401 \begin_layout Standard
23402 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar button can be changed in
23404 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
23405 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
23409 So if the default style above is not the one you need,
23410 you should alter this setting.
23413 \begin_layout Subsection
23417 \begin_layout Standard
23418 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and then choosing
23420 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
23424 This brings up the table dialog.
23425 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell,
23426 row and/or column where the cursor is placed currently.
23427 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
23428 This means that if you select more cells,
23429 columns or rows the action is done on all of your selection.
23432 \begin_layout Standard
23433 In addition to the table dialog,
23437 \begin_inset space ~
23442 helps you in setting table properties.
23443 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
23446 \begin_layout Standard
23450 \begin_inset space ~
23455 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
23456 If you add a row or column,
23457 it will be inserted right beside or below the current cell respectively.
23458 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width is given.
23459 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs of text,
23461 \begin_inset space ~
23465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23467 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
23475 \begin_layout Standard
23476 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell using the check box
23485 This will merge the cells to
23490 spread over more than one column/row.
23491 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows,
23492 so that the alignment,
23494 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
23495 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one in the last row without the upper border:
23498 \begin_layout Standard
23500 \begin_inset Tabular
23501 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
23502 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
23503 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23504 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
23505 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
23506 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23517 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23526 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23602 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23637 \begin_layout Standard
23638 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
23639 -arguments for the table.
23640 They are necessary for special table formatting,
23641 such as the multirow cells,
23642 explained in the chapter
23649 \begin_inset space ~
23655 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
23656 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
23657 but are visible in the output.
23660 \begin_layout Standard
23661 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
23664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23670 Most DVI-viewers are
23674 able to display rotations.
23682 \begin_layout Standard
23687 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
23692 adds lines for all cell borders.
23695 \begin_layout Subsection
23697 \begin_inset Index idx
23702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23704 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23719 \begin_inset Index idx
23724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23733 \begin_layout Standard
23734 If the table is too long to fit on one page,
23735 you can use the option
23738 \begin_inset space ~
23742 \begin_inset space ~
23750 \begin_inset space ~
23755 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
23756 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
23759 \begin_layout Description
23765 The current row and all rows above,
23766 that don't have any special options defined,
23767 are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
23768 Except for the first page,
23772 \begin_inset space ~
23780 \begin_layout Description
23784 \begin_inset space ~
23790 The current row and all rows above,
23791 that don't have any special options defined,
23792 are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
23795 \begin_layout Description
23801 The current row and all rows below,
23802 that don't have any special options defined,
23803 are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
23804 except for the last page,
23808 \begin_inset space ~
23816 \begin_layout Description
23820 \begin_inset space ~
23826 The current row and all rows below,
23827 that don't have any special options defined,
23828 are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
23831 \begin_layout Description
23833 The first row is reset as a single column.
23834 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
23836 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23840 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
23843 \begin_inset space ~
23851 \begin_layout Standard
23852 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
23853 If you set more than one option in the same table row,
23854 you should be aware that then only the first option is used;
23855 the others will be defined as
23861 first means first in this order:
23866 \begin_inset space ~
23880 \begin_inset space ~
23886 see the following longtable to see how it works:
23889 \begin_layout Standard
23891 \begin_inset Tabular
23892 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
23893 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
23894 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
23895 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23896 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23897 <row endfirsthead="true">
23898 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23904 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
23909 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23918 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23928 <row endfirsthead="true">
23929 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23940 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23949 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23961 <row endhead="true">
23962 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23973 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23982 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23992 <row endhead="true">
23993 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24004 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24013 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24025 <row endfoot="true">
24026 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24037 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24046 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24077 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25019 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25028 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
25031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25037 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25048 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25079 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25110 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25141 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25172 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25203 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25234 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25265 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25296 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25327 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25358 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25389 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25420 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25451 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25482 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25513 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25544 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25575 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25606 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25637 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25668 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25699 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25731 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25762 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25793 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25824 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25855 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25886 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25917 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25948 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25979 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26009 <row endlastfoot="true">
26010 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26021 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
26024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26030 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26047 \begin_layout Subsection
26049 \begin_inset Index idx
26054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26056 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
26059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26071 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26073 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
26080 \begin_layout Standard
26081 A table cell can contain text,
26085 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
26086 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
26087 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
26093 nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
26096 \begin_layout Standard
26097 To have multi-line entries in table cells,
26098 you have to declare a fixed width for the column in the table dialog.
26099 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
26103 \begin_layout Standard
26105 \begin_inset Tabular
26106 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
26107 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26108 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26109 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
26110 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26130 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26199 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
26204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26255 This is longer now.
26260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26311 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
26312 This is longer now.
26317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26343 \begin_layout Standard
26344 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
26345 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
26349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26350 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
26355 Selection with the mouse or with
26359 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
26360 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting the selection from outside the table.
26363 \begin_layout Section
26365 \begin_inset Index idx
26370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26386 \begin_layout Subsection
26390 \begin_layout Standard
26391 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label,
26392 which doesn't have a fixed location.
26394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26401 forward or backward a page or two,
26402 to wherever it fits best.
26410 \begin_inset space ~
26416 because they can float to the next page when there are too many notes on the current page.
26419 \begin_layout Standard
26420 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
26421 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace and pages without text.
26422 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and the image/table,
26423 every float can be referenced in the text.
26424 Floats are therefore numbered.
26425 Referencing is described in section
26426 \begin_inset space ~
26430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26432 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26440 \begin_layout Standard
26444 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26448 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
26449 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in the output.
26450 After the label you can insert the caption text.
26451 \begin_inset Index idx
26456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26458 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
26461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26472 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate paragraph within the float.
26473 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
26474 -document readable,
26475 you can open and close the float box by left-clicking on the box label.
26476 A closed float box looks like this:
26478 \begin_inset Graphics
26479 filename clipart/float.png
26484 – a gray button with a red label.
26487 \begin_layout Standard
26488 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
26489 -errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
26492 \begin_layout Subsection
26494 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26496 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
26501 \begin_inset Index idx
26506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26508 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
26511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26525 \begin_layout Standard
26527 \begin_inset space ~
26531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26533 reference "fig:A-star-in"
26538 was created using the menu
26540 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26541 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
26547 arg "float-insert figure"
26551 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and using the menu
26553 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26559 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
26563 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor to the left or right of the image and using the menu
26565 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26567 \begin_inset space ~
26575 arg "layout-paragraph"
26581 \begin_layout Standard
26582 \begin_inset Float figure
26589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26591 \begin_inset Graphics
26592 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
26601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26602 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26607 name "fig:A-star-in"
26624 \begin_layout Standard
26625 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference to it:
26626 Insert a label into the caption using the menu
26628 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26637 ) and refer to it using the menu
26639 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26645 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26649 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using vague references like
26650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26659 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
26660 will reposition the floats in the final document,
26662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26670 For more about cross-references,
26672 \begin_inset space ~
26676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26678 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26686 \begin_layout Standard
26687 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float,
26688 but sometimes you might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
26689 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
26690 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures as described in section
26691 \begin_inset space ~
26695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26697 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26704 \begin_inset space ~
26708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26710 reference "fig:Two-images"
26715 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
26716 You can also set the images one below the other.
26718 \begin_inset space ~
26722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26724 reference "fig:Undefinable"
26730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26732 reference "fig:Star"
26737 are the subfigures.
26740 \begin_layout Standard
26741 \begin_inset Float figure
26748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26749 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26753 \begin_inset Float figure
26760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26761 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26766 name "fig:Undefinable"
26778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26779 \begin_inset Graphics
26780 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
26792 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26796 \begin_inset Float figure
26803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26804 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26822 \begin_inset Graphics
26823 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
26835 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26842 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26845 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26847 name "fig:Two-images"
26864 \begin_layout Subsection
26866 \begin_inset Index idx
26871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26873 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
26876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26890 \begin_layout Standard
26891 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
26893 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26894 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
26897 or the toolbar button
26900 arg "float-insert table"
26904 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures and that the label begins with “tab:”.
26906 \begin_inset space ~
26910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26912 reference "tab:Table-float"
26920 \begin_layout Standard
26921 \begin_inset Float table
26928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26929 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26934 name "tab:Table-float"
26946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26948 \begin_inset Tabular
26949 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
26950 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26951 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26952 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26953 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27080 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
27088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27101 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
27104 \end{array}\right]$
27112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27125 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
27146 \begin_layout Subsection
27148 \begin_inset Index idx
27153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27155 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27172 \begin_layout Standard
27174 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
27175 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme,
27176 to control the float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float caption.
27177 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
27184 \begin_inset space ~
27192 \begin_layout Section
27194 \begin_inset Index idx
27199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27208 \begin_layout Standard
27210 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
27213 all the usual rules of indentation,
27216 \begin_inset space \space{}
27222 \begin_layout Standard
27223 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
27224 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
27226 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27230 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage and its alignment within the page.
27233 \begin_layout Standard
27235 \begin_inset Box Frameless
27245 height_special "totalheight"
27250 backgroundcolor "none"
27253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27256 This is a minipage.
27257 The text is set in an italic style.
27260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27263 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs another formatting.
27271 \begin_layout Standard
27272 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
27275 If you place two minipages side-by-side,
27280 as described in section
27281 \begin_inset space ~
27285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27287 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
27293 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
27299 \begin_layout Standard
27300 \begin_inset Box Frameless
27310 height_special "totalheight"
27315 backgroundcolor "none"
27318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27319 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
27320 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
27326 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
27330 \begin_inset Box Frameless
27340 height_special "totalheight"
27345 backgroundcolor "none"
27348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27349 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
27350 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
27358 \begin_layout Standard
27359 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27365 \begin_layout Standard
27366 When you right-click on a minipage box,
27367 you can transform the box to another box type.
27368 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
27375 \begin_inset space ~
27383 \begin_layout Chapter
27384 Mathematical Formulas
27385 \begin_inset Index idx
27390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27397 \begin_inset Index idx
27402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27404 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
27407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27421 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
27428 \begin_layout Standard
27429 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
27434 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
27437 \begin_layout Section
27439 \begin_inset Index idx
27444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27446 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27463 \begin_layout Standard
27464 To create a math formula,
27465 you can just click on the toolbar icon
27478 That will create a little blue rectangle,
27479 with purple markers around its corners.
27480 That blue rectangle is the formula itself;
27481 the purple markers indicate what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
27482 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
27484 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27490 \begin_layout Standard
27491 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done with the
27494 \begin_inset space ~
27500 that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
27503 \begin_layout Standard
27504 There are two main types of formulas,
27505 inline formulas and display formulas.
27506 Inline formulas appear within a text line,
27510 \begin_layout Standard
27511 This is a line with an inline formula
27512 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
27518 \begin_layout Standard
27519 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate paragraph,
27521 \begin_inset Formula
27528 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
27531 \begin_layout Standard
27533 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
27537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27551 followed by a space,
27552 in a formula will create the Greek letter
27553 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
27557 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
27560 \begin_inset space ~
27568 \begin_layout Subsection
27569 Navigating in Formulas
27570 \begin_inset Index idx
27575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27577 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27594 \begin_layout Standard
27595 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is achieved with the arrow keys.
27597 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
27598 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
27603 will leave a formula construct (a square root
27604 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
27609 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
27614 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
27617 \end{array}\right]$
27625 will leave the formula,
27626 placing the cursor after the formula.
27631 can be used to move horizontally in a formula;
27633 through the cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
27636 \begin_layout Standard
27642 printed in this document as
27643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27647 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27655 seems to do nothing in a formula,
27656 since it does not add a space between characters,
27657 but it does exit a nested structure.
27659 you have to be careful about using
27666 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
27675 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27685 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27689 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27695 since in the latter case only the
27698 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
27703 will be under the square root sign:
27705 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
27711 \begin_layout Standard
27712 You can leave many parts of a formula,
27714 partially filled in,
27716 \begin_inset Formula
27718 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27727 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in,
27728 or a subscript with nothing in it,
27729 the results will be unpredictable,
27730 but most constructs don't mind.
27733 \begin_layout Subsection
27737 \begin_layout Standard
27738 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
27739 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want,
27744 and a cursor movement key to select text.
27745 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
27747 you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
27748 That text can then be cut or copied,
27749 and then pasted within any formula,
27750 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
27754 \begin_layout Subsection
27755 Exponents and Subscripts
27756 \begin_inset Index idx
27761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27763 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27778 \begin_inset Index idx
27783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27785 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27802 \begin_layout Standard
27803 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
27806 arg "math-superscript"
27812 arg "math-subscript"
27816 but it is often much easier to use a command.
27818 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
27825 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27835 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
27842 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
27847 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
27854 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27860 If you use characters in the superscript,
27861 that could be accented with the circumflex
27862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27870 you have to use an extra
27874 to separate the circumflex and the character.
27877 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
27884 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27890 Subscripts are similar:
27892 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
27899 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27907 \begin_layout Subsection
27909 \begin_inset Index idx
27914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27916 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27933 \begin_layout Standard
27934 Create a fraction either with the command
27940 or by using the icon
27943 arg "math-insert \\frac"
27949 \begin_inset space ~
27955 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
27956 The cursor is above the fraction line.
27957 To move it to the bottom,
27969 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction,
27970 as this example shows:
27971 \begin_inset Formula
27973 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
27976 \end{array}\right)}\right]
27984 \begin_layout Subsection
27986 \begin_inset Index idx
27991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27993 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28010 \begin_layout Standard
28011 Roots can be created using the
28014 \begin_inset space ~
28022 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
28028 arg "math-insert \\root"
28050 you can produce roots of higher orders,
28058 always produces a square root.
28061 \begin_layout Subsection
28062 Operators with Limits
28063 \begin_inset Index idx
28068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28070 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28085 \begin_inset Index idx
28090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28092 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28109 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
28116 \begin_layout Standard
28118 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
28122 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
28125 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
28126 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
28127 by entering them as you would enter a super- or subscript,
28128 directly after the symbol.
28129 The sum operator will automatically place its
28130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28137 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas,
28138 and to the side in inline formulas,
28140 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
28145 \begin_inset Formula
28147 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
28154 will place the limits to the side in both formula types.
28157 \begin_layout Standard
28158 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in display mode.
28159 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly behind the operator and using the menu
28161 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28162 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28164 \begin_inset space ~
28168 \begin_inset space ~
28182 \begin_layout Standard
28183 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
28184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28193 \begin_inset Index idx
28198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28200 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28215 \begin_inset Formula
28217 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
28222 which will place the
28223 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
28227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28235 In inline formulas it looks like this:
28237 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
28243 \begin_layout Standard
28244 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
28251 Have a look at section
28252 \begin_inset space ~
28256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28258 reference "subsec:Functions"
28263 for an explanation of function macros.
28266 \begin_layout Subsection
28268 \begin_inset Index idx
28273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28275 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28292 \begin_layout Standard
28293 Most math symbols can be found in the
28296 \begin_inset space ~
28301 under one of several categories;
28322 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
28325 \begin_layout Standard
28326 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28327 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
28328 you don't have to use the
28331 \begin_inset space ~
28337 you can type the command directly into the formula.
28339 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
28342 \begin_layout Subsection
28344 \begin_inset Index idx
28349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28351 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28368 \begin_layout Standard
28369 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28375 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
28381 \begin_inset space ~
28389 arg "math-insert \\space"
28393 This generates a small space,
28394 and shows a small marker on the screen.
28402 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
28405 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28407 \begin_inset Graphics
28408 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
28413 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind the space marker and enter space again several times.
28414 With every space enter the size will be changed.
28415 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
28417 because they are negative spaces.
28418 Here are two examples:
28421 \begin_layout Standard
28432 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
28438 \begin_layout Standard
28449 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
28455 \begin_layout Subsection
28457 \begin_inset Index idx
28462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28464 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28481 name "subsec:Functions"
28488 \begin_layout Standard
28492 \begin_inset space ~
28497 contains under the button
28500 arg "math-insert \\functions"
28503 a number of function macros,
28505 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
28510 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
28519 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
28526 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to avoid confusions,
28528 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
28532 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
28538 \begin_layout Standard
28539 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
28541 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
28545 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
28551 \begin_layout Standard
28552 For some mathematical objects,
28554 the macro changes where subscripts are placed,
28555 as described in section
28556 \begin_inset space ~
28560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28562 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
28570 \begin_layout Subsection
28572 \begin_inset Index idx
28577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28579 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28596 \begin_layout Standard
28597 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text mode.
28598 This may depend on your keyboard,
28599 or the bindings file you use.
28600 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28604 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
28607 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
28608 Our example is entered by typing
28613 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28620 \begin_inset space ~
28624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28626 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
28631 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
28634 \begin_layout Standard
28635 \begin_inset Float table
28642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28643 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28648 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
28652 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
28660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28662 \begin_inset Tabular
28663 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
28664 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28665 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28666 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28667 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28751 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
28761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28805 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
28815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28859 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
28869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28913 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
28923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28967 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
28977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29021 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
29031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29075 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
29085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29129 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
29139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29183 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
29193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29228 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
29249 \begin_layout Standard
29250 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
29253 \begin_inset space ~
29261 arg "math-insert \\hat"
29265 this will apply to any selection you have made within a formula too.
29268 \begin_layout Section
29269 Brackets and Delimiters
29270 \begin_inset Index idx
29275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29277 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29292 \begin_inset Index idx
29297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29299 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29316 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
29323 \begin_layout Standard
29324 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
29327 using just the keys
29332 But if you want to surround a large structure,
29333 like a matrix or a fraction,
29334 or if you have several layers of brackets,
29335 it is better to use the math toolbar delimiter icon
29338 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
29343 if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
29344 \begin_inset Formula
29346 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
29354 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
29356 the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
29359 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
29362 and the expression on the right was entered using the
29368 \begin_inset Formula
29370 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
29378 \begin_layout Standard
29379 If you use the delimiter icon,
29381 and other brackets from that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is inside.
29384 \begin_layout Standard
29385 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the left side and right side.
29386 If you use the option
29389 \begin_inset space ~
29395 the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
29396 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
29398 If you want one side not to have a bracket,
29404 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
29405 with a dotted line,
29406 but nothing will be printed.
29409 \begin_layout Standard
29410 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures,
29411 like a square root,
29412 you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to go inside the brackets.
29413 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
29418 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses,
29421 on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
29423 to insert a pair of parentheses,
29424 select the structure and enter
29427 arg "math-delim ( )"
29433 \begin_layout Section
29434 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
29435 \begin_inset Index idx
29440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29442 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29457 \begin_inset Index idx
29462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29464 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29479 \begin_inset Index idx
29484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29486 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29490 Multi-line Equations
29503 \begin_layout Standard
29504 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
29508 \begin_inset space ~
29516 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
29520 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
29521 Here is an example:
29522 \begin_inset Formula
29524 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
29533 The parentheses aren't automatic,
29534 but you can add them as described in section
29535 \begin_inset space ~
29539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29541 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
29547 When you construct the matrix,
29548 you can decide whether the column entries will be left-,
29550 or center-justified.
29551 This alignment is set in the box
29556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29607 for every column as default.
29610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29621 means that the first column will be left-justified,
29622 the second will be centered,
29623 and the third column will be right-justified,
29624 because each letter corresponds to the relevant column.
29625 The result will look like this:
29626 \begin_inset Formula
29629 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
29630 column & has & has\,right\\
29631 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
29640 \begin_layout Standard
29641 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
29644 arg "newline-insert newline"
29647 while the cursor is in the matrix.
29648 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
29650 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29653 or the math toolbar.
29656 \begin_layout Standard
29657 There are other arrays used in formulas,
29658 such as distinctions of cases.
29659 It can be created with the menu
29661 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29662 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29664 \begin_inset space ~
29676 Here is an example:
29678 \begin_inset Formula
29692 \begin_layout Standard
29693 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29696 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
29699 arg "newline-insert newline"
29703 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear,
29704 one for each column.
29708 arg "newline-insert newline"
29711 in a non-empty formula,
29712 the part before the relation sign (equal sign
29713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29720 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column,
29721 the relation sign is in the second column,
29722 and the rest in the third column.
29723 A new row is created by every further entry of
29726 arg "newline-insert newline"
29730 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
29731 Here is an example:
29732 \begin_inset Formula
29734 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
29735 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
29740 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
29741 \begin_inset Formula
29743 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
29751 \begin_layout Standard
29752 The multi-line formula type described here is called
29759 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
29760 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
29761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29763 reference "eq:asquared"
29769 The other types are described in section
29770 \begin_inset space ~
29774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29776 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29784 \begin_layout Section
29785 Formula Numbering and Referencing
29786 \begin_inset Index idx
29791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29793 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29808 \begin_inset Index idx
29813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29815 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29819 Referencing formulas
29830 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29832 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29839 \begin_layout Standard
29840 To number a formula,
29841 set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
29843 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29844 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29846 \begin_inset space ~
29850 \begin_inset space ~
29858 arg "math-number-toggle"
29862 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29863 within parentheses.
29864 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
29865 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on the document class.
29866 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
29867 separated by a dot:
29868 \begin_inset Formula
29878 arg "math-number-toggle"
29881 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
29882 You can only number displayed formulas.
29885 \begin_layout Standard
29886 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line:
29889 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29890 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29892 \begin_inset space ~
29896 \begin_inset space ~
29904 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
29907 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
29908 \begin_inset Formula
29911 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
29917 To number all lines use the shortcut
29920 arg "math-number-toggle"
29926 \begin_layout Standard
29927 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29930 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
29931 A label is inserted with the menu
29933 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29942 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
29943 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
29944 It is recommended that you use the suggested
29945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29956 as the first part of the label,
29957 because this helps later to identify the label type when you have many labels in your document.
29958 We inserted in the following example the label
29959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29966 in the second line:
29967 \begin_inset Formula
29969 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
29970 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
29975 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
29976 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
29977 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
29979 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29981 \begin_inset space ~
29989 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29993 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
29994 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29995 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output as the formula number:
29998 \begin_layout Standard
29999 This is a cross-reference to equation (
30000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30002 reference "eq:tanhExp"
30010 \begin_layout Standard
30011 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
30012 's cross-reference box are described in section
30013 \begin_inset space ~
30017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30019 reference "sec:Cross-References"
30026 set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and press
30033 \begin_layout Section
30034 User defined math macros
30035 \begin_inset Index idx
30040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30042 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30059 \begin_layout Standard
30061 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you have equations of the same form in a document several times.
30062 Math macros are explained in section
30065 \begin_inset space ~
30077 \begin_layout Section
30081 \begin_layout Subsection
30083 \begin_inset Index idx
30088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30090 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30107 \begin_layout Standard
30108 The standard font for text is italic,
30109 for numbers the standard is roman.
30110 To set a font in a formula,
30114 \begin_inset space ~
30122 arg "math-insert \\font"
30126 or enter its command,
30128 \begin_inset space ~
30132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30134 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
30143 \begin_layout Standard
30144 \begin_inset Float table
30151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30152 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30157 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
30161 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
30169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30171 \begin_inset Tabular
30172 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
30173 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30174 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30175 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30207 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
30215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30234 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
30242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30261 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
30269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30294 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
30302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30321 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
30329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30348 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
30356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30375 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
30383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30409 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
30417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30443 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
30451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30470 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
30478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30504 \begin_layout Standard
30505 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30514 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
30536 \begin_layout Standard
30537 When you use a typeface,
30538 a blue box is inserted in the formula.
30539 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
30544 within the box will set the cursor outside,
30545 so that you have to use a non-breaking space when you need a space in the box.
30546 Here is an example where
30547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30558 denotes the set of numbers:
30559 \begin_inset Formula
30561 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
30569 \begin_layout Standard
30570 The typefaces are nestable,
30571 which can cause confusion.
30584 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
30588 \begin_inset Newline newline
30591 So it is better not to use this feature.
30594 \begin_layout Standard
30595 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
30597 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
30601 \begin_inset Newline newline
30604 You can only print them emboldened using the command
30611 which works like the other typeface commands:
30613 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
30619 \begin_layout Standard
30626 works for all symbols,
30631 \begin_layout Standard
30632 A number of other font options are available as well,
30635 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30636 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
30638 \begin_inset space ~
30646 \begin_layout Subsection
30648 \begin_inset Index idx
30653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30655 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30672 \begin_layout Standard
30673 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font,
30675 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text,
30676 which is obtained using the entry
30679 \begin_inset space ~
30683 \begin_inset space ~
30691 \begin_inset space ~
30699 arg "math-insert \\font"
30703 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
30704 in black instead of blue.
30705 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
30706 Here is an example:
30707 \begin_inset Formula
30710 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
30711 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
30720 \begin_layout Subsection
30722 \begin_inset Index idx
30727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30729 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30746 \begin_layout Standard
30747 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode,
30748 which are automatically chosen in most situations.
30769 For most characters,
30778 are actually the same size,
30780 superscripts and subscripts,
30781 and certain other structures,
30787 Except for some operators,
30788 which resize themselves to accommodate various situations,
30789 all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
30790 thinks are appropriate.
30791 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
30794 arg "math-insert \\style"
30798 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
30801 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
30805 which is normally in
30816 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
30820 The four styles are used in the following example:
30823 \begin_layout Standard
30824 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
30829 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
30834 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
30839 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
30845 \begin_layout Standard
30846 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset is set in a particular size with the menu
30848 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30850 \begin_inset space ~
30856 all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
30858 if the base font size of the document is changed,
30859 all fonts will be adjusted to correspond.
30860 As an example here is a formula in the font size
30861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30871 \begin_layout Standard
30875 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
30881 \begin_layout Section
30882 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
30884 \begin_inset Index idx
30889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30896 \begin_inset Index idx
30901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30903 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30920 \begin_layout Standard
30922 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS) that are in common use.
30925 \begin_layout Subsection
30926 Enabling AMS-Support
30929 \begin_layout Standard
30930 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in the document by setting
30944 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30948 \begin_inset Index idx
30953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30955 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30972 \begin_inset space ~
30978 AMS is needed for many math-constructs;
30979 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30980 -errors in formulas,
30981 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
30984 \begin_layout Subsection
30986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30988 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
30993 \begin_inset Index idx
30998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31000 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31004 Multi-line Equations
31017 \begin_layout Standard
31018 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
31019 provides a selection of different formula types.
31021 allows you to choose between
31046 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
31048 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31056 for an explanation of these formula types.
31059 \begin_layout Chapter
31063 \begin_layout Section
31065 \begin_inset Index idx
31070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31079 name "sec:Cross-References"
31086 \begin_layout Standard
31087 One of \SpecialChar LyX
31088 's strengths is cross-references.
31089 You can reference every
31090 \change_inserted -712698321 1723183496
31091 thing in the document that has a counter
31094 \change_inserted -712698321 1723183501
31096 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31107 \change_inserted -712698321 1723183507
31109 \change_deleted -712698321 1723183511
31113 To reference a document part,
31114 you have to insert a label into it.
31115 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
31116 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
31119 \begin_layout Enumerate
31123 \begin_layout Enumerate
31124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31126 name "enu:Second-item"
31133 \begin_layout Enumerate
31137 \begin_layout Standard
31138 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
31140 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31143 or by pressing the toolbar button
31150 A gray label box like this:
31152 \begin_inset Graphics
31153 filename clipart/label.png
31157 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
31159 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix,
31160 in our case the text
31161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31194 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted;
31196 if you insert a label into a section heading,
31197 the suggested prefix will be
31198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31212 \begin_layout Standard
31213 To reference the item,
31214 we refer to its label using the menu
31216 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31219 or the toolbar button
31222 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
31226 A gray cross-reference box like this:
31228 \begin_inset Graphics
31229 filename clipart/reference.png
31233 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels in the document.
31234 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
31235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31247 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear in the output.
31248 \change_inserted -712698321 1723183607
31252 \begin_layout Standard
31254 \change_inserted -712698321 1723185545
31255 For section headings,
31257 table and figure floats,
31258 this procedure can be simplified by using the outliner (see section
31259 \begin_inset space ~
31263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31265 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
31270 To insert a reference,
31271 simply right-click on the item you want to refer to,
31274 Insert Cross-Reference to this Item
31276 and the desired cross-reference format (see below for those) in the context menu.
31278 will check if the item already has a label and if not,
31279 creates one before inserting the reference.
31280 So all of the above boils down to two clicks!
31283 \begin_layout Standard
31285 \change_deleted -712698321 1723184542
31287 \change_inserted -712698321 1723184543
31289 \change_deleted -712698321 1723184013
31293 \change_inserted -712698321 1723184545
31298 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31300 \change_inserted -712698321 1723184603
31303 which work for all item types (but require a label to exist already) are the following:
31304 \change_deleted -712698321 1723184051
31307 \change_inserted -712698321 1723184553
31311 \begin_layout Itemize
31313 \change_deleted -712698321 1723184557
31315 \change_inserted -712698321 1723184638
31317 \change_deleted -712698321 1723184638
31320 ight-click on a label and in the popup menu select
31325 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted to the actual cursor position via the menu
31327 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31337 \change_inserted -712698321 1723184640
31341 \begin_layout Itemize
31343 \change_inserted -712698321 1723184714
31347 Labels and Cross-References
31350 right-click on the label you want to refer to and select
31352 Insert Reference at Cursor Position
31354 from the context menu.
31357 \begin_layout Standard
31359 \change_inserted -712698321 1723184132
31360 Whatever approach you take,
31362 \change_deleted -712698321 1723184093
31364 \change_inserted -712698321 1723184094
31368 \change_inserted -712698321 1723184100
31371 our cross-reference
31372 \change_inserted -712698321 1723185807
31373 ultimately comes out
31377 \begin_inset space ~
31381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31383 reference "enu:Second-item"
31391 \begin_layout Standard
31392 It is recommended to use a non-breaking space
31396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31397 described in section
31398 \begin_inset space ~
31402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31404 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
31414 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly line breaks between them.
31417 \begin_layout Standard
31418 There are eight formats of cross-references:
31421 \begin_layout Description
31424 this is the default:
31426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31428 reference "fig:Two-images"
31436 \begin_layout Description
31438 prints the number within two parentheses,
31439 this is the style normally used to reference formulas,
31440 especially when the reference name
31441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31452 reference "eq:tanhExp"
31460 \begin_layout Description
31462 prints the page number:
31464 \begin_inset space ~
31468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31469 LatexCommand pageref
31470 reference "fig:Two-images"
31478 \begin_layout Description
31480 \begin_inset space ~
31484 \begin_inset space ~
31488 prints the text “on page” and the page number:
31490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31491 LatexCommand vpageref
31492 reference "fig:Two-images"
31498 \begin_inset Newline newline
31501 If the label is on the same page,
31502 it prints “on this page”;
31503 if the label is on a facing page in a two-sided document,
31504 it prints “on the facing page”;
31505 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page,
31506 it prints “on the previous page”;
31507 if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
31508 it prints “on the next page”.
31509 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
31512 \begin_layout Description
31514 \begin_inset space ~
31518 \begin_inset space ~
31522 \begin_inset space ~
31527 the text “on page” and the page number:
31529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31531 reference "fig:Two-images"
31537 \begin_inset Newline newline
31540 If the label is on the same page,
31541 this format behaves like
31548 otherwise it behaves like
31552 \begin_inset space ~
31556 \begin_inset space ~
31565 \begin_layout Description
31567 \begin_inset space ~
31571 prints a self defined cross-reference format.
31572 \begin_inset Newline newline
31576 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31585 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31595 \begin_inset Index idx
31600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31603 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31618 \begin_inset Index idx
31623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31626 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31646 \begin_inset Newline newline
31649 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
31650 -package should be used for this feature by setting the option
31652 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
31656 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31657 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31665 is the default and preferred because
31669 supports only English documents.
31670 The format is specified by using the command
31674 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
31683 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31684 preamble of the document.
31685 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label shortcut
31686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31702 \begin_inset Newline newline
31709 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
31714 \begin_inset Newline newline
31725 predefines reference formats for all available types.
31726 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem' environments.
31727 So if you want to make formatted references to,
31730 then you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
31736 you might do so as follows:
31737 \begin_inset Newline newline
31744 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
31745 format{prop}{Proposition
31750 \begin_inset Newline newline
31753 For more information about defining formatted references,
31754 have a look at the package documentation
31755 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31757 key "prettyref,refstyle"
31763 \begin_inset Newline newline
31774 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
31779 \begin_inset Newline newline
31782 If you activate the option
31784 Format cross-references in work area
31788 will attempt to display the formatted reference as it would appear in output,
31791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31799 rather than just displaying the label.
31802 \begin_layout Description
31804 \begin_inset space ~
31808 prints the caption or the name of the reference:
31810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31811 LatexCommand nameref
31812 reference "fig:Two-images"
31820 \begin_layout Description
31822 \begin_inset space ~
31826 prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31827 label for the reference:
31829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31830 LatexCommand labelonly
31831 reference "fig:Two-images"
31837 \begin_inset Newline newline
31840 This allows for customization,
31841 using \SpecialChar TeX
31843 if you want to issue a command that \SpecialChar LyX
31850 then you may want to use the
31853 \begin_inset space ~
31859 which will output only the part of the reference following the
31860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31868 This is the form needed for e.
31869 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31873 \begin_inset space \space{}
31880 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31882 The varieties are adjusted in the field
31886 of the cross-reference window,
31887 that appears when you click on the cross-reference.
31890 \begin_layout Standard
31891 You can only use the style
31895 to reference numbered document parts,
31896 while the reference style
31900 is always possible.
31903 \begin_layout Standard
31904 If you want to reference a section,
31905 put the label in the section heading;
31906 for floats put the label in the caption;
31907 for footnotes put the label in it.
31908 Referencing formulas is explained in section
31909 \begin_inset space ~
31913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31915 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
31923 \begin_layout Standard
31924 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
31928 \begin_inset space ~
31932 \begin_inset space ~
31937 sets the cursor before the referenced label (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding label).
31938 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
31941 \begin_inset space ~
31946 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
31947 You can also go back with the toolbar button
31950 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
31957 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
31958 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
31964 \begin_layout Standard
31965 You can change labels at any time.
31966 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you do not need to change them all manually.
31969 \begin_layout Standard
31970 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label,
31971 you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
31972 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead of the reference.
31975 \begin_layout Standard
31976 References are described in detail in the section
31987 \begin_layout Section
31988 Table of Contents and other Listings
31989 \begin_inset Index idx
31994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32001 \begin_inset Index idx
32006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32008 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32023 \begin_inset Index idx
32028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32035 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32044 \begin_layout Subsection
32046 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32048 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
32055 \begin_layout Standard
32056 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
32058 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32059 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32061 \begin_inset space ~
32065 \begin_inset space ~
32071 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
32073 If you click on it,
32079 showing you the TOC entries as outline,
32080 which allows you to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
32081 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
32083 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32085 \begin_inset space ~
32090 that is described in section
32091 \begin_inset space ~
32095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32097 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
32105 \begin_layout Standard
32106 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
32107 If you have declared a short title for a section heading,
32108 as described in section
32109 \begin_inset space ~
32113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32115 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
32121 it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
32123 \begin_inset space ~
32127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32129 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
32134 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are listed in the TOC.
32135 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
32138 \begin_layout Subsection
32141 Listings and Algorithms
32142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32144 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
32151 \begin_layout Standard
32154 listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
32155 You can insert them via the
32157 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32158 List/Contents/References
32161 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
32164 \begin_layout Section
32165 URLs and Hyperlinks
32166 \begin_inset Index idx
32171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32178 \begin_inset Index idx
32183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32192 \begin_layout Subsection
32194 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32203 \begin_layout Standard
32204 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
32206 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32212 \begin_layout Standard
32213 Here is an example URL:
32217 \begin_inset Flex URL
32220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32222 https://www.lyx.org
32230 \begin_layout Standard
32232 the URL text will always be in the style
32237 You can globally change the formatting by putting to
32239 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32240 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32246 \begin_layout LyX-Code
32252 \begin_layout Standard
32276 (use whatever the current text font is).
32277 To have italicized URLs,
32281 \begin_layout LyX-Code
32293 \begin_layout Standard
32294 URLs will break between lines at certain characters,
32298 \begin_layout LyX-Code
32309 \begin_layout Standard
32310 It does not break at a hyphen (
32315 but you can change that by adding
32321 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32322 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32323 Document Class\SpecialChar menuseparator
32324 Class Options\SpecialChar menuseparator
32328 If this still does not break URLs suitably to you,
32329 a last resort is to put
32337 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32338 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32342 this will cause URLs to be broken at every character.
32345 \begin_layout Standard
32346 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32355 URLs must not end with a backslash,
32356 otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
32365 \begin_layout Subsection
32367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32369 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
32376 \begin_layout Standard
32377 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
32379 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32382 or with the toolbar button
32389 The appearing dialog has two fields:
32399 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
32400 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
32402 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32404 name "LyX's homepage"
32405 target "https://www.lyx.org"
32411 an Email address like this:
32413 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32415 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
32416 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
32423 a link to a file or any other valid URI (such as
32432 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32440 \begin_layout Standard
32441 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by adding the prefix
32442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32453 to the link target,
32454 but note that most PDF viewers disable such links for security reasons.
32457 \begin_layout Standard
32458 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
32459 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
32460 To set the format of the link text,
32461 highlight the hyperlink inset and use the text style dialog.
32462 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
32467 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32469 name "LyX's homepage"
32470 target "https://www.lyx.org"
32478 \begin_layout Standard
32479 The link text color can be changed,
32484 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
32486 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32487 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32491 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the option
32492 \begin_inset Newline newline
32500 \begin_inset Newline newline
32507 in the PDF Properties dialog.
32510 \begin_layout Standard
32511 To open the link while editing in \SpecialChar LyX
32512 you can use context menu (or directly via
32514 Ctrl + right mouse button
32519 \begin_layout Section
32521 \begin_inset Index idx
32526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32535 name "sec:Counters"
32542 \begin_layout Standard
32543 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32544 is its ability to manage counters.
32546 this is handled automatically,
32547 but there are times one wants to modify counters directly.
32548 This can be done in \SpecialChar LyX
32549 using the counter inset,
32550 which is accessible from the Edit menu.
32551 This allows one to set a counter's value;
32552 to reset it (to zero);
32556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32557 Note that the section counter,
32559 starts with its value at zero and then is incremented to one when the first section is created.
32561 if you want the next section to be section five,
32563 then you need to set the section counter to four.
32568 to add to the value (or subtract from it,
32569 since the value added can be negative);
32571 to restore the saved value;
32572 and to print the value.
32573 These effects can also be limited to \SpecialChar LyX
32575 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output,
32576 as well as in \SpecialChar LaTeX
32580 \begin_layout Standard
32581 There are five commands you can use:
32584 \begin_layout Enumerate
32590 Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
32593 \begin_layout Enumerate
32599 Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or to subtract,
32600 if you choose a negative number)
32603 \begin_layout Enumerate
32609 Sets the value of the counter to 0.
32612 \begin_layout Enumerate
32615 Save value of counter:
32618 Saves the value of the counter so that it can later be restored.
32621 \begin_layout Enumerate
32624 Restore value of counter:
32627 Restores the previously saved value.
32630 \begin_layout Standard
32631 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all those that are available in the current document class.
32634 \begin_layout Section
32636 \begin_inset Index idx
32641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32650 name "sec:Appendices"
32657 \begin_layout Standard
32658 Appendices are created with the menu
32660 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32662 \begin_inset space ~
32666 \begin_inset space ~
32672 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end as the appendix part of the book.
32673 This part is marked with a red borderline.
32676 \begin_layout Standard
32677 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
32678 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
32679 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot and the subsection number.
32680 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
32684 \begin_layout Standard
32686 \begin_inset space ~
32690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32692 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
32702 \begin_inset space ~
32706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32708 reference "subsec:Export"
32716 \begin_layout Section
32718 \begin_inset Index idx
32723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32732 name "sec:Bibliography"
32739 \begin_layout Standard
32740 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
32742 You can include a bibliography database,
32743 which is explained in sec.
32744 \begin_inset space ~
32748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32750 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
32759 or you can insert the bibliography manually,
32760 using the paragraph environment
32765 which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
32766 \begin_inset space ~
32770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32772 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
32778 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in this document,
32779 such as author-year citations,
32780 and if you have more than a handful of references,
32781 then you should seriously consider
32785 using a bibliography database.
32788 \begin_layout Standard
32789 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches,
32790 we use two bibliographies in this document,
32795 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
32797 the bibliography that is created from a database lists only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
32799 the database approach relieves you,
32800 amongst other things,
32801 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
32804 \begin_layout Subsection
32805 The Bibliography Environment
32806 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32808 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32815 \begin_layout Standard
32821 every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled with a number.
32822 If you click on it,
32823 you will get a dialog in which you can set a
32832 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography entry.
32833 Each entry needs to be given a unique key,
32834 which is one word consisting of ASCII characters only.
32838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32840 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32843 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
32849 \begin_inset Newline newline
32853 \begin_inset Flex URL
32856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32858 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
32869 our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
32871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32879 a short form of its title,
32881 \begin_inset Newline newline
32889 references to it will appear with this label instead of the number of the entry.
32894 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32902 \begin_layout Standard
32903 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
32905 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32908 or the toolbar button
32911 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
32915 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear containing the available citations.
32916 Select one or more keys from the list and
32926 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
32927 If you click on the box,
32928 the citation window will appear and you can change the reference.
32931 \begin_layout Standard
32932 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
32933 Here are two examples;
32934 the first without a label,
32935 the second with the label
32936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32946 \begin_layout Standard
32950 Companion Second Edition
32954 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32956 key "latexcompanion"
32964 \begin_layout Standard
32965 The \SpecialChar LyX
32966 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
32968 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32978 \begin_layout Standard
32979 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations,
32980 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32986 \begin_inset Index idx
32991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32994 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33013 \begin_inset space ~
33018 in the document settings
33019 \begin_inset Index idx
33024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33026 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33042 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
33044 \begin_inset space ~
33050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33052 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
33061 Once you have done that,
33064 Bibliography item settings
33066 dialog has three input fields instead of the
33085 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation reference,
33086 the second the year (without parentheses).
33087 These two are madatory.
33088 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full list (
33094 ) and in abrreviated form (
33099 add the abbreviated form to
33103 and the full list to the optional
33108 If specified like this,
33109 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles in the
33111 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33128 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between full and abbreviated list.
33129 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for the citation references.
33130 In the bibliography entry,
33131 author and year must be added manually.
33134 \begin_layout Standard
33135 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest label via the menu
33137 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33139 \begin_inset space ~
33147 arg "layout-paragraph"
33151 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
33154 \begin_layout Subsection
33155 Bibliography databases
33156 \begin_inset Index idx
33161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33163 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33178 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33180 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
33187 \begin_layout Standard
33188 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different documents.
33192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33193 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning them.
33194 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations and reviews along with bibliographical information.
33199 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography entries.
33200 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of your working field in a database.
33201 This database can be used for different documents,
33202 and by default only the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography list for that document.
33203 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books you have cited.
33206 \begin_layout Standard
33207 The database is a text file with the file extension
33208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33220 containing the bibliography in a special format.
33221 The format is explained in
33222 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33229 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33231 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33233 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
33239 The file can be created using any text editor,
33240 but normally one uses a special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
33241 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
33243 \begin_inset Flex URL
33246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33248 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
33256 \begin_layout Standard
33258 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
33259 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33260 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases for a long time.
33261 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing styles available.
33262 But it has its drawbacks,
33263 especially when it comes to more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
33264 Those are addressed by
33269 \begin_inset Index idx
33274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33277 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33292 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33293 (although it has been significantly extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33304 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33306 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33307 might conversely fail to correctly handle databases that use specific
33317 but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references from it.
33320 \begin_layout Standard
33321 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33327 set in the document settings (menu
33329 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33333 \begin_inset Index idx
33338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33340 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33361 \begin_inset space ~
33366 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33374 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33375 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33377 \begin_inset Index idx
33382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33384 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33388 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33402 \begin_layout Standard
33403 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33407 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33408 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33410 \begin_inset space ~
33416 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33424 Add bibliography to TOC
33426 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
33431 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database in the document or just the cited references.
33436 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s),
33437 should this differ from the encoding of the document.
33440 \begin_layout Standard
33441 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33442 style file is a text file with the file extension
33443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33454 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
33455 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33456 distribution should provide several of these,
33457 and many publishers provide their own style files,
33458 so that you don't have to take care of the layout.
33459 It is of course possible to write your own style file,
33460 but this is something for experts.
33464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33465 For information on how this is done,
33467 \begin_inset Newline newline
33471 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33473 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
33483 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33489 which provides an alpha-numeric style.
33492 \begin_layout Standard
33493 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
33496 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33498 \begin_inset Index idx
33503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33505 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33520 \begin_inset Index idx
33525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33528 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33545 \begin_layout Standard
33546 Accessing a database via
33550 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33554 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33555 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33557 \begin_inset space ~
33563 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33564 you cannot select a
33568 file at this place.
33569 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33572 note the following.
33575 \begin_layout Standard
33580 has two different style files:
33581 a bibliography style file (text file with the file extension
33582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33593 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style file (text file with the file extension
33594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33605 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
33606 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching styles.
33607 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography style.
33610 \begin_layout Standard
33615 styles are not set in the
33618 \begin_inset space ~
33624 but in the document settings.
33625 \begin_inset Index idx
33630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33632 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33647 in the dialog in the
33652 which is only visible if you use
33657 you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for example how its heading will appear).
33658 These options are described in detail in the
33664 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33672 \change_inserted -712698321 1720530740
33676 \begin_layout Standard
33678 \change_inserted -712698321 1720530806
33679 Note that the Chicago style biblatex mode has built-in citation and bibliography styles which can only be slightly adapted via the bibliography options (please refer to the package manual for details).
33684 \begin_layout Standard
33685 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
33686 \begin_inset space ~
33690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33692 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
33703 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33704 Bibliography Processors
33707 \begin_layout Standard
33708 To generate the bibliography from a database,
33710 uses a bibliography processor,
33711 that is an external program that reads the database,
33712 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
33713 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33715 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread,
33716 but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations,
33720 \begin_layout Standard
33722 some alternatives have been developed that address some of these limitations.
33723 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
33724 You can do this on a general level in
33726 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33727 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33728 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
33731 or for individual documents in
33733 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33734 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33738 The following variants are available by default:
33741 \begin_layout Description
33744 \begin_inset Index idx
33749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33752 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33766 developed exclusively for
33770 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33776 provides full Unicode support,
33777 unlimited memory and many specific features
33787 it is strongly recommended to use
33794 \begin_layout Description
33795 bibtex the standard;
33796 does not allow special characters in bibliography entries that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding,
33798 works with all bibliography packages,
33799 although it will probably fail with
33803 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
33806 \begin_layout Description
33807 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding (but no Unicode support),
33813 works with all bibliography packages,
33814 although more complex
33818 bibliographies will exceed its limits,
33823 features are supported.
33826 \begin_layout Standard
33827 By default (with the
33833 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33834 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33847 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33848 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33849 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
33854 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography approach (
33867 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33868 -based bibliography styles).
33869 This should suit most needs.
33872 \begin_layout Standard
33873 In Japanese documents,
33874 a specific processor is used.
33875 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
33876 (in \SpecialChar LyX
33882 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33883 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
33884 You can adjust it in
33886 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33887 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33888 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
33894 \begin_layout Standard
33895 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you can add below the selection.
33896 Before adding options,
33897 it is strongly recommended that you read the manual of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33904 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33914 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33918 \begin_layout Standard
33920 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple bibliographies.
33921 These are explained in detail in section
33923 Customizing Bibliographies
33927 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33932 Additional Features
33934 manual.Citation Format
33935 \begin_inset Index idx
33940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33942 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33959 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
33966 \begin_layout Standard
33967 Many different citation formats are common,
33969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33973 \begin_inset space \space{}
33976 numerical citation (as
33977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33984 like in this document),
33985 alpha-numerical citations (as
33986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33993 ) or author-year citations (as
33994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34003 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style files.
34006 \begin_layout Standard
34007 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
34010 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34011 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34015 \begin_inset Index idx
34020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34022 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34036 you have a range of other options,
34037 depending on your preferred bibliography approach.
34042 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography labels,
34046 \begin_inset space ~
34057 \begin_inset space ~
34062 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
34063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34065 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
34073 \begin_layout Standard
34074 With a bibliography database (see
34075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34077 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
34085 ) one has in contrary to the
34089 environment full access to the formatting styles.
34090 These style formats are available:
34093 \begin_layout Description
34095 \begin_inset space ~
34098 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34099 -based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric citations).
34102 \begin_layout Description
34103 Biblatex loads the package
34108 \begin_inset Index idx
34113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34116 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34130 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
34132 Biblatex citation style
34136 Biblatex bibliography style
34139 Options to the package
34143 can be entered in the
34148 \change_inserted -712698321 1720530575
34152 \begin_layout Description
34154 \change_inserted -712698321 1720530576
34156 \begin_inset space ~
34160 \begin_inset space ~
34163 style) loads the package
34168 \begin_inset Index idx
34173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34175 \change_inserted -712698321 1720530576
34178 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34183 \change_inserted -712698321 1720530576
34199 This is a specific variant particularly for users who want to follow the
34201 Chicago Manual of Style
34205 \begin_inset Flex Code
34208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34210 \change_inserted -712698321 1720530576
34219 \begin_inset Flex Code
34222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34224 \change_inserted -712698321 1720530576
34232 mode are supported.
34237 \begin_layout Description
34239 \begin_inset space ~
34243 \begin_inset space ~
34246 mode) loads the package
34250 with the natbib compatibility mode.
34251 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that uses
34262 behavior very closely.
34267 this option has some additional styles.
34272 styles are also supported by this variant.
34273 \change_inserted -712698321 1720530371
34277 \begin_layout Description
34279 \begin_inset space ~
34282 (BibTeX) loads the package
34287 \begin_inset Index idx
34292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34295 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34309 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
34312 \begin_layout Description
34314 \begin_inset space ~
34317 (BibTeX) loads the package
34322 \begin_inset Index idx
34327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34330 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34344 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
34347 \begin_layout Standard
34356 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical citation styles.
34357 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
34367 this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
34369 Whether the output uses numerical,
34370 author-year or another format such as alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
34372 Biblatex citation style
34376 when switching between Author-year and Author-number,
34377 a suitable style is proposed.
34384 the dialog selection will ultimately determine the style.
34387 \begin_layout Standard
34388 For any author-year and author-numerical selection,
34389 multiple style variants are available in the
34394 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase a name prefix such as
34395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34410 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
34411 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34415 \begin_inset space \space{}
34419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34430 \begin_layout Standard
34431 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation reference,
34433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34437 \begin_inset space \space{}
34441 which will then be formatted according to the style's needs (e.
34442 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34446 \begin_inset space \space{}
34450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34462 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
34466 \begin_inset space ~
34474 \begin_inset space ~
34480 Here is a simple example where the text
34481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34485 \begin_inset space ~
34489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34492 appears after the reference:
34495 \begin_layout Quote
34497 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34500 key "latexcompanion"
34508 \begin_layout Standard
34509 All styles except for
34513 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such as
34514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34522 This text is then also included in the parentheses,
34523 if the style requires this.
34526 \begin_layout Standard
34527 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
34528 So if you refer to multiple references at once,
34529 the prenote will precede the first citation in the list,
34530 the postnote will follow the last.
34535 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a multi-citation (so-called
34536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34539 qualified citation lists
34540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34546 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple items the
34550 dialog will display three columns in the field
34558 \begin_inset space ~
34567 \begin_inset space ~
34575 \begin_inset space ~
34581 If you double-click on an item's
34584 \begin_inset space ~
34592 \begin_inset space ~
34598 you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
34601 General text before
34607 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
34610 \begin_layout Subsection
34611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34613 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
34617 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
34621 \begin_layout Standard
34623 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
34626 \begin_inset space ~
34630 \begin_inset space ~
34634 \begin_inset space ~
34638 \begin_inset space ~
34641 Content\SpecialChar ldots
34644 context menu if specific conditions are met:
34647 \begin_layout Itemize
34648 If citation entries include any of the fields
34649 \begin_inset Flex Code
34652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34659 \begin_inset Flex Code
34662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34668 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
34670 \begin_inset Flex Code
34673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34679 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv,
34684 \begin_inset Flex Code
34687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34694 the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
34697 \begin_layout Itemize
34698 If citation entries include any of the fields
34699 \begin_inset Flex Code
34702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34708 (filled by JabRef and Zotero) or
34709 \begin_inset Flex Code
34712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34718 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local drive,
34719 the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
34720 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
34723 \begin_layout Standard
34724 In addition to that,
34730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34731 By default we provide python script
34732 \begin_inset Flex Code
34735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34742 but you can use any modified script by setting
34743 \begin_inset Flex Code
34746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34749 citation_search_view
34754 variable in the file
34758 in your local configuration directory (please refer to the respective section at
34760 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
34764 The default setting is to be found in the file
34768 in the same directory and can be copied and modified for this purpose.
34773 your disk for matching files if you enable
34775 Search drive for cited files
34779 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34780 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
34781 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34782 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34786 It uses the tokens supplied at
34790 in the same preferences section (by default:
34795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34796 Provided by token sequence
34797 \begin_inset Flex Code
34800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34801 %year% %abbrvciteauthor%
34807 Note that some constituents (
34808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34825 commas) are automatically stripped from the result.
34831 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the name of the file (at arbitrary position).
34833 opens the first matching file it finds.
34834 This might or might not be the file you are looking for;
34835 the more systematic your file naming is,
34836 and the less ambiguous keywords you use,
34837 the greater the chance this works for you.
34840 \begin_layout Standard
34841 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
34842 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34844 \begin_inset Flex Code
34847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34854 \begin_inset Flex Code
34857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34864 but there are also special keys,
34865 which are documented in the
34867 Customization manual
34873 Cite format description
34878 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34879 Security implications
34882 \begin_layout Standard
34883 Note that any document (or mainly
34884 \begin_inset Flex Code
34887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34893 file in this case) coming from a third party might contain malicious links or otherwise malformed URLs and we suggest you do not use this feature for other documents than those you prepared yourself.
34896 \begin_layout Standard
34897 For that reason the searching on disk is disabled by default and you will be asked for confirmation of viewing all the links (both can be bypassed,
34898 but beware what you are doing).
34901 \begin_layout Section
34903 \begin_inset Index idx
34908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34924 \begin_layout Standard
34925 An index entry is created if you use the menu
34927 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34929 \begin_inset space ~
34934 or the toolbar button
34941 \begin_inset space ~
34945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34947 reference "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
34952 for some advanced methods).
34953 A collapsible inset with green label is inserted;
34954 this holds the text that appears in the index (if you read this in \SpecialChar LyX
34957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34964 index inset in the heading above for example).
34965 The word where the cursor is in,
34966 or the currently highlighted text,
34967 is proposed by \SpecialChar LyX
34969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34973 copied into the inset).
34976 \begin_layout Standard
34977 The index list (which prints out the index in your document) is inserted via the menu
34979 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34980 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34982 \begin_inset space ~
34988 A light blue box labeled
34989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35000 will show the place where the index will be printed.
35002 the index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
35004 as there are no settings to make.
35005 This changes if you select
35006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35009 Use multiple indexes
35010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35014 \begin_inset space ~
35018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35020 reference "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
35030 the box turns gray and can be clicked (as there are now settings that can be made).
35033 \begin_layout Standard
35035 an index entry is simply a word or phrase in the (alphabetically ordered) index list with a reference to the page or pages where the index entry has been inserted in the document.
35037 you can customize index entries to look different.
35038 You can group index entries hierarchically,
35039 let the index list refer to a range of pages rather than a single page,
35040 let it refer to another entry in the index list rather than,
35041 or additionally to,
35043 you can format the page reference (e.
35044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35048 make it bold for specific pages),
35049 and you can determine the order of an entry in the list.
35050 These features are available in \SpecialChar LyX
35052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35061 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35064 that appears if the cursor is in an index entry or via the index settings dialog which can be opened via right mouse click on the index inset.
35067 \begin_layout Standard
35068 We describe these features in turn in the next subsections.
35069 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35070 's index mechanism,
35071 have a look at one of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35073 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35075 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
35083 \begin_layout Subsection
35084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35086 name "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
35090 Grouping Index Entries
35091 \begin_inset Index idx
35096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35098 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35115 \begin_layout Standard
35116 Index entries are often hierarchically grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the index and to hold categories together (e.g.,
35122 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35129 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35136 This can be done in \SpecialChar LyX
35139 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35140 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
35150 Both methods insert a subinset in which you can enter the subentry.
35151 Maximally two such subentry insets,
35153 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35157 three levels of grouping in total,
35158 are allowed per index entry.
35159 Note that it does not matter where you insert these subentry insets in the index inset,
35160 but the order of them matters and determines the grouping hierarchy.
35161 In the \SpecialChar LyX
35163 the index entry in the header above shows an example for a two-level grouped entry (and you can see the result in the index of this document at the entry
35168 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35177 \begin_layout Standard
35179 each subentry is on a new line and indented a bit more.
35180 Note that the higher levels only get their own page references if they have also a separate entry (without subentry).
35183 \begin_layout Standard
35184 Note also that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35186 subentries are indicated by a preceding exclamation mark character
35187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35195 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
35198 \change_deleted -712698321 1723474901
35200 \change_inserted -712698321 1723474901
35204 \change_inserted -712698321 1723474911
35206 \change_deleted -712698321 1723474914
35210 \change_deleted -712698321 1723474917
35212 \change_inserted -712698321 1723474926
35213 in \SpecialChar TeX
35218 \change_deleted -712698321 1723474935
35220 a real exclamation mark has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
35224 \begin_inset space ~
35228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35230 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
35239 \begin_layout Subsection
35241 \begin_inset Index idx
35246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35248 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35265 \begin_layout Standard
35267 an index entry refers to single pages where the index entries have been inserted.
35268 If you want to refer to a page range instead,
35269 you can do this by inserting two index entries:
35270 one that marks the beginning of the range,
35271 the other that marks its end.
35272 Both need to contain the same index entry (and possibly subentries) text.
35273 To mark start and end,
35274 select the respective
35278 option in the index inset settings dialog.
35279 Range starts and ends are indicated in the index inset label via
35280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35298 \begin_layout Standard
35299 Note that you have to take care that range markers are complete.
35300 If a range start without a respective end (or vice versa) is found,
35301 the index processor might terminate and not produce an index without informing you about the reason.
35304 \begin_layout Subsection
35306 \begin_inset Index idx
35311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35313 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35330 \begin_layout Standard
35331 It is also possible to refer to another index entry rather than,
35334 This might be useful if you anticipate that your readers might look for an entry at different places,
35336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35348 (which could be resolved by a cross reference
35349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35361 ) or also if you use hierarchical grouping (section
35362 \begin_inset space ~
35366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35368 reference "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
35375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35390 \begin_layout Standard
35391 This is possible in \SpecialChar LyX
35394 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35395 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
35401 \begin_layout Standard
35402 If you want a cross-reference and page references,
35405 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35406 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
35411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35418 instead and makes more sense if you also add entries that are referred to by page number as in
35419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35437 \begin_layout Subsection
35438 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35440 name "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
35445 \begin_inset Index idx
35450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35452 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35469 \begin_layout Standard
35470 Sometimes the automatic ordering of index entries is not the one you want.
35471 This might be the case with some index processors (such as
35475 ) if you use accented characters in the index entry or if you use macros.
35478 \begin_layout Standard
35479 To accommodate for that,
35482 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35483 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
35487 The sortkey you enter here is not output in the index,
35488 it is just used for sorting (instead of the actual entry).
35490 you can pass the sort key
35491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35502 should your index processor be incapable to sort Slovenian postmodern philosophers correctly.
35505 \begin_layout Standard
35506 Note that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35508 sortkeys are separated from the actual entry by the character
35509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35517 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
35520 \change_deleted -712698321 1723475013
35521 have to take care that the character is not formatted
35522 \change_inserted -712698321 1723475013
35523 need to insert the character in \SpecialChar TeX
35528 \change_deleted -712698321 1723475019
35530 a real @ character has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
35534 \begin_inset space ~
35538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35540 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
35548 \begin_layout Subsection
35549 Index Entry Formatting
35550 \begin_inset Index idx
35555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35557 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35574 \begin_layout Standard
35575 The appearance of index entries can be formatted as usual via the text style dialog,
35576 the toolbar or shortcuts.
35577 Entries will appear in the index list in the way they are formatted in the index entry.
35578 \begin_inset Index idx
35583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35585 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35591 This is an italic dummy entry
35601 Note that this also means that two differently formatted otherwise identical entries,
35603 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35616 will be listed separately.
35620 \begin_layout Standard
35621 To format a page reference,
35626 option in the index entry settings dialog.
35627 You can either select one of the proposed formatting options (
35647 you are supposed to enter a valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
35654 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35658 a self-defined command
35659 \begin_inset Flex Code
35662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35668 or an existing macro such as
35669 \begin_inset Flex Code
35672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35681 \begin_layout Standard
35683 we encourage you to use self-defined commands.
35684 This makes it easier to change the formatting,
35685 should you or your publisher decide to do that later.
35687 add a formatting macro for index entries that refer to the page(s) where the indexed term is defined by putting the following in the preamble
35690 \begin_layout Standard
35702 \begin_layout Standard
35703 and add the custom formatting
35704 \begin_inset Flex Code
35707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35713 to the respective entry settings dialog.
35716 \begin_layout Standard
35717 This will cause all page references that use this custom format to be printed in italics.
35718 If you change your mind later or if your publisher insists that definitions must not be italic but bold,
35719 you just need to change the macro in the preamble,
35720 not every single index entry.
35723 \begin_layout Standard
35724 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35733 If you use the index processor
35739 makeindex or xindex
35742 \begin_inset space ~
35746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35748 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
35754 such custom macros do not work out of the box.
35759 requires you to define semantic elements in the xindy
35760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35767 (style file) you use before they can be used.
35769 this would require to add the following line in the module file:
35772 \begin_layout Verbatim
35774 (markup-locref :open "
35776 IndexDef{" :close "}" :attr "IndexDef")
35779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35781 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35784 key "latexcompanion"
35797 \begin_layout Standard
35798 You can also change the layout of the whole index.
35800 if you mark the index list box as bold,
35801 you will get a bold font for all index entries.
35804 it is better (and required for more advanced tasks) to set up a so-called
35829 ) to determine the formatting;
35830 please refer to the
35843 documentations for details,
35845 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35847 key "makeindex,xindex,xindy"
35853 There are also some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35854 packages available that ease such formatting,
35856 \begin_inset Flex URL
35859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35861 https://ctan.org/topic/index
35869 \begin_layout Subsection
35870 Special Characters in Index Entries
35871 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35873 name "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
35880 \begin_layout Standard
35881 As already mentioned above,
35882 some characters have a special meaning in index entries,
35885 \begin_inset Flex Code
35888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35896 \begin_inset Flex Code
35899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35907 \begin_inset Flex Code
35910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35911 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35921 \begin_inset Flex Code
35924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35932 \change_deleted -712698321 1723475049
35933 If you use them literally,
35934 you might get surprising results or even a non-working index.
35936 you will not get the character itself
35937 \change_inserted -712698321 1723475153
35938 Since the respective functionality is achievable in \SpecialChar LyX
35940 these characters are escaped by
35941 \begin_inset Flex Code
35944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35946 \change_inserted -712698321 1723475136
35947 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35957 if you insert them to indexes,
35958 so you get the literal character in the output
35963 \begin_layout Standard
35965 \change_deleted -712698321 1723475160
35966 In order to use these characters in inset entries,
35968 \begin_inset Quotes els
35972 \begin_inset Quotes ers
35976 that is prepended by a character that tells the index processor to treat this character without its special meaning.
35978 the escape character is
35979 \begin_inset Flex Code
35982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35983 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35991 (but this can be changed).
35993 \begin_inset Flex Code
35996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35997 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36007 \begin_inset Flex Code
36010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36011 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36021 \begin_inset Flex Code
36024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36025 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36029 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
36039 \begin_inset Flex Code
36042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36043 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36051 to get the special character you want.
36052 Note that the escape character,
36054 \begin_inset Flex Code
36057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36058 \begin_inset Quotes qld
36067 \change_inserted -712698321 1723475173
36068 If you want the special meaning instead,
36076 \change_deleted -712698321 1723475181
36080 \change_deleted -712698321 1723475183
36084 \change_inserted -712698321 1723475191
36085 these special characters
36087 in a TeX code box (see section
36088 \begin_inset space ~
36092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36094 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36102 \begin_layout Subsection
36103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36105 name "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
36109 Convenience Functions for Index Handling
36112 \begin_layout Standard
36113 Indexing a document can be a tedious task,
36114 since you often have to insert the same index entry multiple times in order to refer to passages at different pages.
36115 This is not only time-consuming,
36116 but also error-prone;
36118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36122 you have to remember how exactly an inset entry has been inserted to avoid redundant entries.
36124 provides some functions to ease the task.
36127 \begin_layout Standard
36129 if you want to add an entry which you already used before,
36130 you can open the outliner via
36132 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36136 \begin_inset space ~
36140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36142 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
36152 section (it is convenient to have this open while indexing anyway),
36153 scroll to the entry in question (if you check
36158 it will be more easier),
36163 -click on the entry and select
36165 Insert Copy at Cursor Position
36167 from the context menu.
36168 This will do just what it says:
36169 it will insert a copy of that index inset at the position where the cursor is.
36172 \begin_layout Standard
36175 also provides a semi-automated solution to index a word.
36176 If you right-click on an index entry inset,
36177 you can select from the context menu
36179 Index All Occurrences of this Word
36182 This will search the whole document (only single documents,
36183 not master and child documents) and insert a copy of this index inset after each occurrence of the word that precedes the inset.
36184 Note that casing of the word does not matter,
36185 but only full words in the same grammatical form are considered (so if
36189 is the word before the index entry,
36194 will be considered as well,
36200 Please take care to not overuse this function and to carefully check the result afterwards.
36202 a good index does not simply list all occurrences of a given word in a specific document (that is a concordance rather),
36203 but only relevant occurrences!
36204 So as convenient as this function might seem,
36205 it is suitable especially for particular cases.
36207 you will have more work with removing again falsely inserted entries than you would have with manually inserting them at the right place.
36210 \begin_layout Subsection
36212 \begin_inset Index idx
36217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36219 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36234 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36236 name "subsec:Index-Program"
36243 \begin_layout Standard
36244 If the index processor,
36257 for that matter) for index generation;
36258 otherwise the program
36263 the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
36266 As a further option,
36267 you can select the rather new
36274 \begin_layout Itemize
36280 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
36281 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
36282 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly (we have shown above,
36284 \begin_inset space ~
36288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36290 reference "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
36296 how to manually fix this sorting,
36297 but this is very tedious work).
36300 \begin_layout Itemize
36301 The alternative program,
36307 is a newer and much more mighty alternative.
36308 It can sort most languages correctly,
36309 and it is also much more customizable in the output.
36315 is no longer actively maintained,
36316 and it has bugs that are most likely not being addressed anytime soon.
36322 is not always available out of the box and quite a challenge to install on some systems (particularly Windows).
36323 But if you have it available,
36324 it is almost always a better option than
36331 \begin_layout Itemize
36338 is a quite new and actively developed index processor.
36339 It is included in modern \SpecialChar TeX
36340 distributions such as \SpecialChar TeX
36341 Live and Mik\SpecialChar TeX
36343 is pretty much customizable and supports many languages.
36344 The program is still in development,
36345 so not everything might work equally well than in the older processors.
36346 But the program is definitely worth a try,
36351 does not work or not satisfy your needs.
36354 \begin_layout Standard
36355 All processors can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
36356 's preferences dialog,
36358 \begin_inset space ~
36362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36364 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
36370 The available options are listed and explained in
36371 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36373 key "makeindex-man,xindex,xindy"
36380 you can even specify arbitrary alternative programs to generate the index.
36383 \begin_layout Standard
36384 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a given document,
36385 you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
36388 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36389 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36393 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
36396 \begin_layout Subsection
36397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36399 name "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
36406 \begin_layout Standard
36407 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
36409 you might need to set up a separate
36410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36417 next to the standard index.
36419 does not provide this possibility out of the box,
36420 but there are packages that add this feature.
36427 \begin_inset Index idx
36432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36435 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36449 package to generate multiple indexes.
36450 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
36455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36456 If yours does not ship it,
36457 consult the \SpecialChar TeX
36460 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36468 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36470 but it also includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
36471 Please consult the package's manual for details.
36479 \begin_layout Standard
36480 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
36481 for the use of multiple indexes,
36484 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36485 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36488 and select the option
36490 Use multiple Indexes
36497 already contains the standard index
36498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36506 To add further indexes,
36507 add the name of the index (in the form that should also appear as a heading) to the
36511 input field and press the
36516 The new index now also appears in the list.
36518 you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
36519 label color to the new index.
36522 \begin_layout Standard
36523 Once the document changes have been applied,
36524 you can find the new index list in
36526 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36527 List/Contents/References
36533 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
36534 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index,
36535 but there are additional features:
36538 \begin_layout Itemize
36539 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry,
36540 right-clicking on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
36543 \begin_layout Itemize
36544 By right-clicking on an index,
36545 you can change its type.
36547 you can specify an index to be a
36553 the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
36555 if you use a book class,
36556 where the standard index heading is defined as a chapter,
36557 subindexes will be defined as sections and can thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
36560 \begin_layout Itemize
36565 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
36566 code in the name of the index.
36569 \begin_layout Section
36570 Nomenclature/Glossary
36571 \begin_inset Index idx
36576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36583 \begin_inset Index idx
36588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36590 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
36593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36607 name "sec:Nomenclature"
36614 \begin_layout Standard
36615 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so called nomenclature or glossary.
36618 \begin_layout Standard
36619 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries,
36620 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36626 \begin_inset Index idx
36631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36634 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36649 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36651 \change_deleted -712698321 1723454635
36656 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36663 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36665 \change_inserted -712698321 1723454632
36667 \change_deleted -712698321 1723454632
36673 \begin_layout Standard
36674 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry and then use the menu
36676 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36682 \begin_inset space ~
36687 or the toolbar button
36690 arg "nomencl-insert"
36695 \change_deleted -712698321 1723454657
36697 \change_inserted -712698321 1723454660
36701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36713 \change_deleted -712698321 1723454685
36714 and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry
36718 \change_inserted -712698321 1723454710
36719 If the cursor is after a word,
36720 this is copied into the inset.
36725 \begin_layout Standard
36727 \change_inserted -712698321 1724253386
36730 \change_deleted -712698321 1724253387
36732 \change_inserted -712698321 1724253387
36735 nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
36736 The first is the term or
36740 that you wish to define.
36745 of the term or symbol.
36747 \change_inserted -712698321 1724253392
36748 The former is inserted into the collapsible inset directly,
36749 the latter into the
36753 sub-inset which is automatically inserted or can be inserted via the
36760 \begin_layout Standard
36762 \change_inserted -712698321 1724253593
36763 In addition to this,
36765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36772 nomenclature style in
36774 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36775 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36780 the nomenclature is set as a multi-page table (with four columns) rather than a list,
36781 and it provides two more entries:
36786 (for units of all kinds) and
36790 (for additional notes).
36791 These two entries can also be selected via the
36800 \begin_layout Standard
36802 \change_deleted -712698321 1723454741
36803 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36812 To use \SpecialChar TeX
36813 code for nomenclature entries the option
36817 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
36827 \begin_layout Subsection
36828 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
36829 \begin_inset Index idx
36834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36836 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36853 \begin_layout Standard
36855 \change_inserted -712698321 1723454941
36856 Within the nomenclature inset,
36857 you can use math and formatting as usual.
36858 \change_deleted -712698321 1723454925
36859 If you have symbols in formulas,
36860 you have to define them in the
36864 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
36867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36871 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36880 \begin_inset Newline newline
36888 \begin_inset Newline newline
36894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36901 character starts/ends the formula.
36902 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
36903 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with a backslash
36904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36914 For capital Greek letters,
36915 start the command also with a capital letter,
36925 \begin_layout Standard
36927 \change_deleted -712698321 1723454925
36928 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36929 syntax is given in section
36930 \begin_inset space ~
36934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36936 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
36944 \begin_layout Standard
36946 \change_deleted -712698321 1723454925
36950 \begin_inset space ~
36955 dialog to format the description text;
36956 you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
36958 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
36959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36963 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36970 in this document is:
36971 \begin_inset Newline newline
36976 dummy entry for the character
36981 \begin_inset Newline newline
36993 \begin_inset space ~
37003 font use the command
37036 \begin_layout Standard
37037 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
37038 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37042 \begin_inset space \space{}
37046 \begin_inset Newline newline
37062 \begin_inset Newline newline
37065 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
37066 This command will make the font of all symbols
37073 \begin_inset space ~
37081 \begin_layout Standard
37083 \change_deleted -712698321 1723454959
37084 If the characters |
37085 \begin_inset space \space{}
37089 \begin_inset space \space{}
37093 \begin_inset space \space{}
37098 \begin_inset space \space{}
37102 \begin_inset space \space{}
37105 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
37106 code they need to be escaped by adding a percent character in front of them.
37107 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
37108 LatexCommand nomenclature
37109 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
37110 description "Special characters in nomenclature context which need to be escaped by `\\%'"
37120 \begin_layout Subsection
37121 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
37122 \begin_inset Index idx
37127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37129 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37146 \begin_layout Standard
37147 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37149 \change_deleted -712698321 1723454966
37151 \change_inserted -712698321 1723454966
37154 code of the symbol definition.
37155 This leads to undesired results
37156 \change_deleted -712698321 1723454971
37158 \change_inserted -712698321 1723454971
37163 have symbols in formulas.
37164 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
37167 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
37168 LatexCommand nomenclature
37170 description "dummy entry for the character ``a''"
37178 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
37182 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
37183 LatexCommand nomenclature
37186 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
37192 They will be sorted by
37193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37219 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
37222 will be sorted before the
37226 since the character
37227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37234 is considered in sorting.
37237 \begin_layout Standard
37238 To control the sort order,
37240 \change_deleted -712698321 1723454992
37244 \begin_inset space ~
37249 field of the nomenclature dialog
37250 \change_inserted -712698321 1723455033
37255 subinset which is to be found in the
37262 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol definition.
37263 For the example given,
37268 in this field for the
37269 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
37277 will be located before
37278 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
37284 \begin_layout Standard
37286 \change_deleted -712698321 1724304988
37287 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
37293 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37305 \begin_layout Subsection
37306 Nomenclature Options
37307 \begin_inset Index idx
37312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37314 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37331 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
37338 \begin_layout Standard
37344 \change_deleted -712698321 1724303919
37346 \change_inserted -712698321 1724303922
37349 options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
37351 \change_inserted -712698321 1724303527
37354 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37355 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37359 \change_deleted -712698321 1724303912
37360 Here are some of its options;
37361 for more have a look at its documentation:
37366 \begin_layout Description
37368 \change_inserted -712698321 1724303686
37370 \begin_inset space ~
37373 style offers the selection between the default style,
37374 which outputs the nomenclature as a list and a tabular style which sets it as a multipart table.
37375 The latter style features two more constituents of the nomenclature entry:
37376 a unit (which is typeset by means of the
37380 package) and an additional note.
37383 \begin_layout Description
37385 \change_inserted -712698321 1724303561
37387 \begin_inset space ~
37391 \begin_inset space ~
37395 \begin_inset space ~
37399 \begin_inset space ~
37402 contents adds the nomenclature list to the table of contents.
37405 \begin_layout Description
37407 \change_inserted -712698321 1724305361
37409 \begin_inset space ~
37413 \begin_inset space ~
37417 \change_deleted -712698321 1724303715
37421 \change_deleted -712698321 1724303716
37423 \change_inserted -712698321 1724303717
37427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37443 to every nomenclature entry,
37450 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
37453 \begin_layout Description
37455 \change_deleted -712698321 1724303727
37457 \change_inserted -712698321 1724305363
37459 \begin_inset space ~
37463 \begin_inset space ~
37469 \change_deleted -712698321 1724303734
37471 \change_inserted -712698321 1724303734
37475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37491 to every nomenclature entry,
37498 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appear
37499 \change_deleted -712698321 1724305457
37501 \change_inserted -712698321 1724305457
37507 \begin_layout Description
37509 \change_deleted -712698321 1724303752
37511 \change_inserted -712698321 1724303758
37513 \begin_inset space ~
37517 \begin_inset space ~
37523 \change_deleted -712698321 1724303777
37524 Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
37525 \change_inserted -712698321 1724309742
37526 uses predefined subgroups (Latin Letters,
37529 Subscripts) to structure the nomenclature list.
37534 \begin_layout Standard
37536 \change_inserted -712698321 1724311045
37537 Entries are assigned to a subgroup via the
37540 \begin_inset space ~
37546 If you use subgroups,
37547 the first letter of the sort string indicates the subgroup (a:
37555 the following the sorting within the group.
37556 A is used by default if no sorting has been manually specified.
37559 \begin_layout Standard
37561 \change_inserted -712698321 1724309722
37562 Please refer to the
37568 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37576 if you need different subgrouping.
37582 \begin_layout Description
37584 \change_inserted -712698321 1724303903
37586 \begin_inset space ~
37589 options lets you insert any of the other options the package provides.
37590 Please refer to the
37596 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37609 \begin_layout Standard
37611 \change_deleted -712698321 1724303935
37612 To use one or more of the options,
37613 add them to the comma-separated document class options list in the
37615 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37619 In this document the options
37627 \begin_layout Standard
37629 \change_deleted -712698321 1724303935
37630 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
37638 \begin_layout Standard
37640 \change_deleted -712698321 1724303954
37641 You can also use the first two options above
37642 \change_inserted -712698321 1724306838
37643 With the default style,
37644 if you want to add page or equation references
37647 \change_deleted -712698321 1724303972
37649 \change_inserted -712698321 1724303972
37653 \change_inserted -712698321 1724303974
37655 \change_deleted -712698321 1724303976
37658 nomenclature entries
37659 \change_inserted -712698321 1724303985
37662 \change_deleted -712698321 1724303987
37666 \change_inserted -712698321 1724303990
37669 one of the following commands
37670 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304028
37671 in \SpecialChar TeX
37675 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304042
37677 \change_deleted -712698321 1724304042
37681 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304098
37683 \change_deleted -712698321 1724304050
37685 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304050
37693 \change_deleted -712698321 1724304011
37695 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304011
37699 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304088
37701 \change_deleted -712698321 1724304016
37707 \begin_layout Description
37711 \change_deleted -712698321 1724304118
37717 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304130
37718 for an equation reference
37723 \begin_layout Description
37727 \change_deleted -712698321 1724304133
37733 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304135
37734 for a page reference
37739 \begin_layout Description
37743 \change_deleted -712698321 1724304161
37751 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304175
37752 for a combined equation and page reference
37755 \begin_layout Standard
37757 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304216
37758 If you have selected a reference option in document settings,
37759 you can also disable it for selected entries by adding instead either of
37764 \begin_layout Description
37768 \change_deleted -712698321 1724304228
37770 \begin_inset space ~
37774 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304229
37778 \begin_layout Description
37782 \change_deleted -712698321 1724304230
37784 \begin_inset space ~
37788 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304231
37792 \begin_layout Description
37796 \change_deleted -712698321 1724304230
37797 Turns off the corresponding options
37802 \begin_layout Standard
37804 \change_inserted -712698321 1724306868
37805 Note that you need to add
37806 \begin_inset Flex Code
37809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37811 \change_inserted -712698321 1723460010
37821 in front of these command if the nomenclature is in a section heading or caption.
37822 Also note that these commands do not work in tabular style.
37825 \begin_layout Standard
37827 \change_deleted -712698321 1724304289
37829 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304292
37830 Expressions such as
37833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37840 are automatically translated for most document languages.
37842 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304360
37843 (or if you want a different wording)
37846 add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
37850 \begin_layout Standard
37859 \begin_inset Newline newline
37865 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
37868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37869 \begin_inset space ~
37885 \begin_inset Newline newline
37892 pagedeclaration}[1]{
37893 \begin_inset Newline newline
37899 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
37902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37903 \begin_inset space ~
37921 \begin_layout Standard
37922 If the numbers should be hyperlinks,
37923 assure that you use
37926 \begin_inset space ~
37931 in the document settings under
37934 \begin_inset space ~
37942 \begin_layout Standard
37950 \begin_inset Newline newline
37954 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
37957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37958 \begin_inset space ~
37971 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
37973 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
37974 \begin_inset Newline newline
37981 pagedeclaration}[1]{
37982 \begin_inset Newline newline
37986 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
37989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37990 \begin_inset space ~
38003 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
38008 \begin_layout Subsection
38009 Printing the Nomenclature
38010 \begin_inset Index idx
38015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38017 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38034 \begin_layout Standard
38036 \change_deleted -712698321 1724304544
38038 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304545
38042 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304556
38043 at the location where it should be printed
38048 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38049 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
38054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38065 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
38067 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304569
38071 \begin_layout Standard
38073 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304668
38074 With default nomenclature style,
38075 you can adjust the list appearance (space between symbol and description and list indentation)
38076 \change_deleted -712698321 1724304607
38078 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304610
38081 y right-clicking on
38082 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304620
38084 \change_deleted -712698321 1724304636
38086 the amount of space for symbols can be altered
38090 \change_deleted -712698321 1724304674
38092 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304674
38095 between these settings:
38098 \begin_layout Description
38099 Default a space of 1
38100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38106 \begin_layout Description
38108 \begin_inset space ~
38112 \begin_inset space ~
38116 \change_inserted -712698321 1721576787
38118 \begin_inset space ~
38124 \change_inserted -712698321 1721576880
38127 \change_deleted -712698321 1721576836
38130 widest symbol of all nomenclature entries
38131 \change_deleted -712698321 1721576839
38133 \change_inserted -712698321 1721576839
38137 \change_inserted -712698321 1721576845
38139 \change_deleted -712698321 1721576844
38141 \change_inserted -712698321 1721576994
38142 Note that this guessing might go wrong,
38143 as \SpecialChar LyX
38144 does not know how the formatted output in your PDF will look like exactly.
38149 \begin_layout Description
38151 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304720
38153 \begin_inset space ~
38157 \begin_inset space ~
38161 \begin_inset space ~
38164 (set) here you can enter the widest symbol yourself to use its width.
38165 While this is more accurate than the second method,
38166 the disadvantage is that you need to keep this up to date if new (longer) entries are added to the nomenclature.
38171 \begin_layout Description
38172 Custom custom space
38173 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304744
38174 as specified in the widget.
38179 \begin_layout Standard
38180 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
38181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38189 If you are not happy with the name,
38190 you can change it by redefining the command
38198 in order to change the name to
38203 add the following line to the preamble:
38206 \begin_layout Standard
38219 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
38222 \begin_layout Standard
38224 \change_deleted -712698321 1724304772
38226 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304772
38229 you are using another document language than English,
38231 \begin_inset Newline newline
38245 \change_deleted -712698321 1724304814
38247 \change_inserted -712698321 1724304814
38253 where *** is the name of the language used.
38256 \begin_layout Subsection
38257 Nomenclature Program
38258 \begin_inset Index idx
38263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38265 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38280 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38282 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
38289 \begin_layout Standard
38296 that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
38298 to generate the nomenclature.
38300 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
38306 \begin_inset space ~
38310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38312 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
38318 The available options are listed and explained in
38319 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38321 key "nomencl,makeindex"
38329 \begin_layout Section
38331 \begin_inset Index idx
38336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38343 \begin_inset Index idx
38348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38350 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38367 name "sec:Branches"
38374 \begin_layout Standard
38375 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
38376 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the pupils to see the answers,
38377 but having questions and answers in the same document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
38380 \begin_layout Standard
38381 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
38382 allows you to put text into branches.
38383 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
38384 To create a branch,
38385 either select the menu
38387 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38388 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
38391 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
38393 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38401 where you can specify and change the name of the branch,
38402 its activation state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
38403 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
38404 and whether the name of the branch should be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active (see below for an example).
38406 the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch to the name of the other) and to add
38407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38419 \begin_inset space ~
38422 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents,
38423 without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
38426 \begin_layout Standard
38427 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
38428 These boxes are inserted via the menu
38430 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38433 where you can choose a branch.
38434 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking on them.
38437 \begin_layout Standard
38438 Here is an example,
38439 where only the question text appears,
38440 the answer branch is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
38443 \begin_layout Standard
38444 \begin_inset Branch Question
38448 \begin_layout Standard
38454 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
38462 \begin_layout Standard
38463 \begin_inset Branch Answer
38467 \begin_layout Standard
38473 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
38481 \begin_layout Standard
38488 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38489 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38493 the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
38494 Consider for example a file
38495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38502 which has the above branches.
38504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38512 the PDF export file would be called
38513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38536 branch were inactive,
38538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38575 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
38576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38579 if both branches were active.
38580 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
38581 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
38587 \begin_layout Standard
38588 It is also possible to invert just some branch insets,
38589 whose content is output just in case the branch is
38593 activated (they are marked with ~ before the name).
38594 Such insets make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
38595 To control whether a particular inset is inverted,
38596 right-click on the inset button and choose
38599 \begin_inset space ~
38607 \begin_layout Standard
38608 \begin_inset Branch Answer
38612 \begin_layout Standard
38619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38626 branch is deactivated.
38632 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
38638 \begin_layout Standard
38639 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
38640 like inside equations,
38641 you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
38642 definitions for each branch.
38643 For example you can define for the question branch
38647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38648 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38651 \begin_inset space ~
38655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38657 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
38670 \begin_layout Standard
38680 \begin_layout Standard
38690 \begin_layout Standard
38691 and for the answer branch
38694 \begin_layout Standard
38704 \begin_layout Standard
38714 \begin_layout Standard
38715 \begin_inset Branch Question
38719 \begin_layout Standard
38723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38751 \begin_layout Standard
38752 \begin_inset Branch Answer
38756 \begin_layout Standard
38760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38788 \begin_layout Standard
38789 Now it is possible to use the
38793 question{\SpecialChar ldots
38800 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
38803 commands to obtain conditional output.
38804 Here is an example formula where only the
38811 \begin_inset Formula
38813 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
38821 \begin_layout Standard
38823 the same effect can be achieved using math macros,
38831 \begin_layout Standard
38832 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout files (e.
38833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38837 \begin_inset space \space{}
38840 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
38842 For this advanced usage,
38850 Flex insets and InsetLayout
38855 \begin_layout Standard
38856 In case you often need to keep all branches of a given name in sync as far as their open/close status is concerned,
38857 you can use the \SpecialChar LyX
38862 that sets the open/close state to all branches of the same name from the branch currently at cursor.
38863 You can bind it to a keyboard shortcut or add it to a user-defined context menu for branch insets.
38866 \begin_layout Section
38868 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38870 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
38875 \begin_inset Index idx
38880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38889 \begin_layout Standard
38892 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38893 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38896 allows you to set up specifics of your document's PDF output.
38897 Most of these specifics are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38903 \begin_inset Index idx
38908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38911 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38925 which you need to enable by clicking
38927 Use Hyperref Support
38929 in order to set the PDF properties (if the package is already loaded by your document class or another package,
38930 the checkbox you need to click is labeled
38932 Customize Hyperref Options
38935 Among other things,
38936 hyperref hyperlinks all URLs and cross-references in the PDF output.
38937 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on an URL,
38938 a table of contents entry or on a reference to open a website or to move to the cross-referenced part of the document.
38940 you can set PDF metadata (such as document author and title),
38941 or determine how the PDF is being opened by the reader program.
38944 \begin_layout Standard
38945 The header information in the dialog tab
38949 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
38950 Many programs are able to extract this information,
38952 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
38953 This is very useful to sort,
38954 classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
38958 \begin_inset space ~
38962 \begin_inset space ~
38968 hyperref tries to extract the header information from your document title and author entries.
38972 \begin_inset space ~
38976 \begin_inset space ~
38980 \begin_inset space ~
38985 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode,
38986 which is useful for presentations.
38989 \begin_layout Standard
38994 you can customize the look of such links,
38995 and you can specify if and which bibliographical backreferences are created.
39000 are links inserted at the end of bibliographic entries pointing to either sections,
39001 pages or slides on which these entries are being cited.
39005 \begin_inset space ~
39009 \begin_inset space ~
39013 \begin_inset space ~
39018 option allows long links to be split;
39022 \begin_inset space ~
39026 \begin_inset space ~
39030 \begin_inset space ~
39038 \begin_inset space ~
39043 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames
39044 \change_inserted 5863208 1727201632
39049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39051 \change_inserted 5863208 1727201632
39052 The "colorlinks" option in the hyperref package disables the borders at the beginning of the document.
39053 If you want both you need to add the following to the preamble after enabling colored links
39054 \begin_inset Flex Code
39057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39059 \change_inserted 5863208 1727201632
39064 hypersetup{pdfborder=0 0 1}}
39080 \begin_inset space ~
39085 colors the different links.
39086 The default colors are:
39089 \begin_layout Labeling
39090 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
39095 for hyperlinks and URLs
39098 \begin_layout Labeling
39099 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
39107 \begin_layout Labeling
39108 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
39116 \begin_layout Standard
39117 but you can change these in the tab
39123 in this document they were changed with these additional options added to
39130 \begin_layout Quote
39139 \begin_layout Standard
39144 you can specify if PDF bookmarks (shown as a collapsible outline in the PDF reader) should be created for every section of your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
39145 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections or not.
39150 you can instruct the PDF reader to uncollapse the outliner when opening the PDF.
39155 determines up to which level this uncollapsing is done.
39157 \begin_inset space ~
39160 2 will display all sections and subsections,
39162 \begin_inset space ~
39165 1 will only display the sections (collapsing the rest).
39168 \begin_layout Standard
39173 dialog tab you can insert hyperref options which are not among the ones described above as a comma-separated list (please refer to the hyperref manual
39174 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39181 for a full list and documentation of possible options).
39182 Note that these options will be passed to hyperref via
39183 \begin_inset Flex Code
39186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39195 not via the package options.
39196 This will exclude some options that can only be specified via the latter.
39197 If you need to use one of those options,
39198 you can set them by adding
39201 \begin_layout Quote
39204 PackageOptions hyperref option1,option2
39207 \begin_layout Standard
39210 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39211 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39214 (but only if hyperref is not loaded by your document class).
39217 \begin_layout Standard
39222 input widget allows you to insert PDF properties that are independent of the hyperref package and rely on some (rather new) \SpecialChar LaTeX
39224 This requires \SpecialChar LaTeX
39225 version 06/2022 at least (with earlier versions,
39226 input is simply ignored).
39227 The widget expects a comma-separated list of key-value options (such as
39233 At the point of writing this,
39234 the list of options is still rather small and not very well documented (look for a file called
39236 documentmetadata-support.pdf
39239 but it is expected that in the future,
39240 rather fundamental PDF properties (such as structure tagging for accessibility reasons and different PDF standards such as PDF/A) can be set this way.
39243 \begin_layout Section
39245 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39247 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39249 name "sec:TeX-Code"
39256 \begin_layout Subsection
39259 \begin_inset Index idx
39264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39274 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39281 \begin_layout Standard
39282 As \SpecialChar LyX
39283 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
39285 it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
39286 commands and constructs,
39289 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
39290 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
39291 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
39292 -package for every problem,
39293 though \SpecialChar LyX
39294 cannot support all packages and their commands.
39297 \begin_layout Standard
39299 you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
39300 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
39301 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
39304 Code box is created by the menu
39306 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39308 \begin_inset space ~
39313 or by the toolbar button
39326 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on it and selecting
39333 \begin_layout Standard
39334 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
39336 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
39339 if you want to draw a frame around a word
39343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39344 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
39349 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39357 you can write the command part
39363 in a \SpecialChar TeX
39364 Code box before the word and the closing brace
39368 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
39369 Code box behind the word.
39370 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
39371 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the following example:
39374 \begin_layout Standard
39375 \begin_inset Graphics
39376 filename clipart/ERT.png
39384 \begin_layout Standard
39388 \begin_layout Standard
39389 This is a line with a
39393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39416 \begin_layout Standard
39417 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39426 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
39427 -commands without parameters,
39428 you have to insert a space to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
39429 know that the command is finished.
39437 \begin_layout Subsection
39438 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39440 \begin_inset Argument 1
39443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39444 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
39451 \begin_inset Index idx
39456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39464 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39466 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
39473 \begin_layout Standard
39474 When you write larger documents or books,
39475 you will need to know something about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39476 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
39477 uses in the background.
39478 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
39479 is based on commands,
39481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39489 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at any time if you know the right commands.
39491 imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline is the end of the day.
39492 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have all caption labels bold.
39493 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels in your manual.
39494 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one day.
39497 \begin_layout Standard
39498 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
39500 As mentioned above,
39501 for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
39503 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39506 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39516 \begin_layout Standard
39517 As result you find that the package
39522 \begin_inset Index idx
39527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39530 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39546 you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
39548 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39551 \SpecialChar menuseparator
39555 \begin_inset space ~
39563 \begin_layout Standard
39568 usepackage[options]{package name}
39571 \begin_layout Standard
39572 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
39573 commands begin with a backslash,
39574 the command argument is set within two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
39575 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
39578 \begin_layout Standard
39579 In your case the package name is
39584 After a look in the documentation of the package,
39585 you know that the option
39589 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
39590 So you add the command
39593 \begin_layout Standard
39598 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
39601 \begin_layout Standard
39602 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
39606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39607 For more commands provided by the
39612 have a look at its documentation,
39614 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39629 \begin_layout Standard
39630 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems like your case.
39631 For example if you use a
39636 you don't need the package
39641 you can instead write
39644 \begin_layout Standard
39649 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
39654 \begin_layout Standard
39655 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
39656 So if you plan to write a large document,
39657 you should have a look at the documentation of the document class you want to use.
39664 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
39667 \begin_layout Standard
39668 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document,
39669 while commands in the text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command argument.
39670 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
39672 use the \SpecialChar TeX
39673 Code box as described in the previous section.
39676 \begin_layout Standard
39677 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
39679 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39681 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39683 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
39691 \begin_layout Standard
39692 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
39698 \begin_layout Standard
39702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39712 \begin_inset Note Note
39715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39716 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
39724 \begin_layout Left Header
39725 \begin_inset Argument 1
39728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39748 \begin_inset Note Note
39751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39752 defines the header line as described below
39760 \begin_layout Center Header
39761 \begin_inset Argument 1
39764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39773 \begin_layout Right Header
39774 \begin_inset Argument 1
39777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39798 \begin_layout Left Footer
39799 \begin_inset Argument 1
39802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39823 \begin_layout Center Footer
39824 \begin_inset Argument 1
39827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39839 \begin_inset Newline newline
39843 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
39849 \begin_layout Right Footer
39850 \begin_inset Argument 1
39853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39875 \begin_layout Section
39876 Customized Page Headers and Footers
39877 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39879 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
39884 \begin_inset Index idx
39889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39891 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39906 \begin_inset Index idx
39911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39920 \begin_layout Standard
39921 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document,
39922 you need to set the
39925 \begin_inset space ~
39936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39942 \begin_inset space ~
39948 As a second step add in the menu
39950 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39951 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39960 Custom Header/Footerlines
39963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39967 This module offers the following 6
39968 \begin_inset space ~
39974 \begin_layout Description
39976 \begin_inset space ~
39980 \begin_inset space ~
39984 \begin_inset space ~
39988 \begin_inset space ~
39992 \begin_inset space ~
39998 \begin_layout Description
40000 \begin_inset space ~
40004 \begin_inset space ~
40008 \begin_inset space ~
40012 \begin_inset space ~
40016 \begin_inset space ~
40022 \begin_layout Standard
40023 for the different positions in the header/footer.
40024 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
40027 \begin_layout Standard
40029 headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
40030 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
40032 \begin_inset space ~
40036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40038 reference "fig:Page-layout"
40043 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
40046 \begin_layout Standard
40047 \begin_inset Float figure
40054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40057 \begin_inset Tabular
40058 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
40059 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
40060 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
40061 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
40062 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
40064 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
40067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
40076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40082 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
40085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40093 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
40096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40111 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
40114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40122 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
40125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40126 The normal text on the page goes here.
40127 The running header is above the text,
40128 and the footer is below (including footnotes).
40129 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number,
40130 title of the chapter,
40131 company logo but you can use almost anything,
40137 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40146 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
40149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40157 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
40160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40175 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
40178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40186 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
40189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
40198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40204 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
40207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40222 \begin_inset Caption Standard
40224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40227 name "fig:Page-layout"
40231 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
40244 \begin_layout Standard
40245 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40254 some document classes implement their own customized page headers and footers if
40257 \begin_inset space ~
40262 is set to “Default”.
40263 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers and footers.
40271 \begin_layout Subsection
40275 \begin_layout Standard
40276 To define your header line,
40277 add all three header environments.
40278 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages,
40279 the things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
40280 For single-sided documents,
40281 the optional arguments will not be used and can be omitted.
40282 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty,
40283 nothing appears in the output.
40284 Defining the footer line works similarly.
40287 \begin_layout Standard
40288 For the definition,
40289 you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
40290 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
40293 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40295 \begin_inset space ~
40303 \begin_layout Description
40306 thepage prints the current page number
40309 \begin_layout Description
40312 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
40315 \begin_layout Description
40318 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
40321 \begin_layout Description
40324 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
40325 If the document has chapters,
40326 it prints the current chapter number and title instead.
40328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40332 \begin_inset Quotes prd
40335 because it usually goes in a left header.
40338 \begin_layout Description
40341 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
40342 If the document has chapters,
40343 it prints the current section number and title instead.
40344 It is normally used in the right header.
40347 \begin_layout Subsection
40348 Default header/footer
40351 \begin_layout Standard
40352 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
40353 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center footer has the page number.
40354 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer,
40355 include the relevant header/footer style in your document,
40356 but leave it blank.
40358 if you do not want a page number in the footer,
40362 \begin_inset space ~
40370 \begin_layout Subsection
40374 \begin_layout Standard
40375 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
40376 Some pages are different.
40377 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own,
40378 and so does any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
40379 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers,
40380 but that is normal.
40381 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
40384 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40385 Header and footer decoration line
40388 \begin_layout Standard
40391 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40394 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
40395 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
40407 in the following way:
40410 \begin_layout Standard
40417 headrulewidth}{thickness}
40420 \begin_layout Standard
40421 where thickness is a size in standard units like
40434 If you don't want a line,
40435 set the thickness to 0
40436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40442 \begin_layout Standard
40443 The lines can also be colored,
40444 but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40446 If you really need this,
40447 have a look at the Internet or in section
40448 \begin_inset space ~
40452 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40462 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40463 Several header/footer lines
40466 \begin_layout Standard
40467 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer,
40468 you can do this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
40470 the default height of the header/footer is only the height of one text line.
40471 To expand the height,
40472 redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40487 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40488 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40490 \begin_inset space ~
40498 \begin_layout Standard
40505 headheight}{height}
40508 \begin_layout Standard
40513 is a size in standard units (e.
40514 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40518 \begin_inset space \space{}
40526 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height,
40527 define your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
40528 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40529 logfile with the menu
40531 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40533 \begin_inset space ~
40541 \begin_inset space ~
40546 to see if you can find a warning about the package
40551 \begin_inset Index idx
40556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40559 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40574 If there is such a warning,
40575 it contains the space that you need at least for your header/footer.
40578 \begin_layout Subsection
40582 \begin_layout Standard
40583 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
40584 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
40585 This example consists of the following definition:
40588 \begin_layout Description
40590 \begin_inset space ~
40600 empty optional argument
40603 \begin_layout Description
40605 \begin_inset space ~
40609 empty optional argument
40612 \begin_layout Description
40614 \begin_inset space ~
40624 in the optional argument
40627 \begin_layout Description
40629 \begin_inset space ~
40639 in the optional argument
40642 \begin_layout Description
40644 \begin_inset space ~
40658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40662 \begin_inset Newline newline
40666 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
40670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40673 in the optional argument
40676 \begin_layout Description
40678 \begin_inset space ~
40688 empty optional argument
40691 \begin_layout Description
40694 headrulewidth set to 2
40695 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40701 \begin_layout Standard
40702 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers,
40704 For more specialized features,
40707 see the manual of the
40713 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40723 \begin_layout Standard
40724 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
40730 \begin_layout Standard
40734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40738 pagestyle{headings}
40744 \begin_inset Note Note
40747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40748 switches back to page style with the default headings
40756 \begin_layout Section
40757 Previewing Snippets of your Document
40758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40760 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40765 \begin_inset Index idx
40770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40777 \begin_inset Index idx
40782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40784 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40801 \begin_layout Standard
40803 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
40806 \begin_layout Subsection
40810 \begin_layout Standard
40811 To get previews working,
40812 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40818 \begin_inset Index idx
40823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40826 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40840 (on some systems named simply
40845 If it is not already installed,
40846 you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
40849 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40856 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40858 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
40867 for \SpecialChar LyX
40868 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40869 -package are automatically installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
40873 \begin_layout Subsection
40877 \begin_layout Standard
40878 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
40879 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
40881 activate the option
40884 \begin_inset space ~
40891 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40897 \begin_inset space ~
40901 \begin_inset space ~
40904 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
40911 \begin_inset space ~
40924 \begin_inset space ~
40929 is the multiplication factor for the size.
40932 \begin_layout Standard
40933 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
40938 \begin_inset space ~
40946 \begin_inset space ~
40954 \begin_layout Standard
40955 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
40956 and when you finish editing an inset.
40959 \begin_layout Standard
40960 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40969 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately generated by activating the option
40972 \begin_inset space ~
40978 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
40986 \begin_layout Subsection
40987 Selected document parts
40990 \begin_layout Standard
40991 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
40992 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
40993 cannot render like rotated parts or things that are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
40996 insert a preview inset via the menu
40998 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41002 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
41003 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
41004 If you click on the preview,
41005 you can edit the previewed stuff.
41008 \begin_layout Standard
41010 To create rotated boxes,
41011 you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41018 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
41023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41030 is explained in section
41032 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
41037 \begin_inset space ~
41047 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
41048 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
41049 the final rotated boxes,
41050 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
41051 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated boxes into it.
41052 Here is the result:
41055 \begin_layout Standard
41056 \begin_inset Preview
41058 \begin_layout Standard
41063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41067 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
41073 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
41083 height_special "totalheight"
41088 backgroundcolor "none"
41091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41116 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
41122 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
41129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41144 \begin_layout Standard
41145 Previewing works also for colors.
41146 In this example a special framed,
41147 colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41165 is explained in section
41172 \begin_inset space ~
41185 \begin_layout Standard
41186 \begin_inset Preview
41188 \begin_layout Standard
41192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41211 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
41216 This is text within a colored,
41221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41236 \begin_layout Standard
41237 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
41243 \begin_layout Standard
41244 If \SpecialChar LyX
41245 does not show a preview,
41246 make sure that you enabled previews as described above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
41247 Code in the preview inset is valid and that you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41248 packages in your document preamble that are required by the \SpecialChar TeX
41250 If \SpecialChar LyX
41251 cannot create a preview,
41252 you will in most cases also not be able to view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
41254 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
41255 Code and don't know if it is correct,
41256 the preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
41259 \begin_layout Subsection
41264 \begin_layout Standard
41265 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41266 source of the whole document or parts of it.
41269 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41271 \begin_inset space ~
41276 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41278 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor currently sits.
41279 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
41281 then only this selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
41282 To view the whole document as source,
41283 enable the corresponding option in the source view window.
41289 you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
41291 but note that if you have several documents open,
41292 this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
41294 not just the one which is open at the time.
41297 \begin_layout Section
41298 Advanced Find and Replace
41299 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41301 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
41306 \begin_inset Index idx
41311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41318 \begin_inset Index idx
41323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41332 \begin_layout Subsection
41336 \begin_layout Standard
41337 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
41338 allows for searching of complex,
41339 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
41341 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
41342 The key-features are:
41345 \begin_layout Itemize
41346 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed,
41347 where the latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way;
41348 not only entire mathematical formulas are found,
41349 but also parts occurring within more complex formulas
41352 \begin_layout Itemize
41353 Search may be format-insensitive,
41354 so that the searched text is found in any context/style (standard text,
41357 and even mathematics),
41358 or it may be format-sensitive,
41361 a word entered with a section heading will only be found within section headings
41364 \begin_layout Itemize
41365 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only;
41366 this is useful for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text outside of mathematics environments
41369 \begin_layout Itemize
41370 Search may be widened to a specific
41376 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41380 \begin_inset space ~
41383 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
41384 all the open files,
41385 or all the manuals available from the
41392 \begin_layout Itemize
41393 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization,
41394 so that the replaced text capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
41395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41399 \begin_inset space ~
41404 first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
41407 \begin_layout Subsection
41411 \begin_layout Standard
41412 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
41414 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41427 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
41430 ) or the toolbar button
41433 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41439 Advanced Find and Replace
41444 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41448 \begin_layout Standard
41454 mini-editor a simple word,
41455 and search for occurrences of it by clicking on the
41458 \begin_inset space ~
41463 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
41466 arg "paragraph-break"
41470 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode,
41472 bold or normal face,
41473 and in both in section titles and in standard text.
41477 arg "paragraph-break"
41480 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
41484 searches backwards.
41487 \begin_layout Standard
41491 \begin_inset space ~
41496 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
41504 \begin_inset space ~
41509 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
41512 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41513 Searching for mathematics
41516 \begin_layout Standard
41517 Mathematical formulas,
41519 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
41522 or something more complex like
41523 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
41527 may be searched for by typing them in the
41532 When searching for a formula,
41533 it is found both when it is alone and when it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
41534 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
41535 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
41541 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41545 \begin_layout Standard
41546 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
41547 This is done by switching to the
41551 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
41564 \begin_layout Itemize
41565 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word occurring in emphasized or boldface.
41568 \begin_layout Itemize
41569 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective instances with the same face only,
41570 and within the same text style only.
41573 \begin_layout Itemize
41574 a normal word in a section heading,
41575 and searching for it,
41576 would find occurrences of it only within section headings.
41578 if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face,
41579 in addition to a section style,
41580 then it is found only when occurring with the same style.
41583 \begin_layout Itemize
41584 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
41587 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41591 \begin_layout Standard
41592 The entries made in the
41596 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
41599 \begin_inset space ~
41605 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it,
41610 button or alternatively press
41613 arg "paragraph-break"
41620 while the cursor is in the
41623 \begin_inset space ~
41631 \begin_layout Standard
41632 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
41634 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention two):
41637 \begin_layout Itemize
41638 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the same word,
41639 for example replacing occurrences of a name like
41640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41647 with its typewriter version
41648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41662 \begin_layout Itemize
41663 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols,
41664 for example replacing occurrences of
41665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41669 \begin_inset Formula $R$
41673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41681 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
41685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41688 (you may want to enable the
41691 \begin_inset space ~
41699 \begin_inset space ~
41704 options and disable the
41713 in order to avoid replacing all
41714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41721 letters occurring in normal text),
41723 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
41727 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
41732 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
41736 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
41742 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41746 \begin_layout Standard
41747 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
41751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41752 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
41754 \begin_inset CommandInset href
41756 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
41766 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into the
41771 This is done with the context menu
41773 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41774 Insert Regular Expression
41776 while the cursor is in the
41781 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular expression matching rules
41785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41786 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
41789 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41793 \begin_inset space ~
41796 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
41798 no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to match expressions.
41804 while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the same text in the document.
41805 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
41806 Examples of using such a feature may be:
41809 \begin_layout Enumerate
41810 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator:
41816 editor the fraction
41817 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
41821 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
41824 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all fractions with the given denominator.
41827 \begin_layout Enumerate
41828 Searching for all text with a given style:
41832 Adhere to search string formatting of
41838 button in this section pressed,
41842 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
41847 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face,
41848 finds all emphasized or bold face text respectively.
41851 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
41854 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
41855 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
41856 The meaning of the specific style options (if checked) is as follows:
41860 \begin_layout Description
41861 Language Allows searching for text in specific language (relevant here is,
41862 as with the other options,
41863 the setting of the search string)
41866 \begin_layout Description
41868 \begin_inset space ~
41871 color colored text like cyan,
41876 \begin_layout Description
41878 \begin_inset space ~
41886 \begin_layout Description
41888 \begin_inset space ~
41895 \begin_layout Description
41897 \begin_inset space ~
41906 \begin_layout Description
41908 \begin_inset space ~
41917 \begin_layout Description
41918 Emph/noun Semantic Markup:
41923 \begin_layout Description
41930 \begin_layout Description
41931 Strike-through Single,
41935 \begin_layout Description
41936 Deletion searches also in deleted parts (in case of 'Track Changes' enabled)
41939 \begin_layout Description
41941 \begin_inset space ~
41953 \begin_layout Standard
41955 references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
41956 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
41957 \begin_inset Formula $()$
41961 and referring back to them through
41962 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
41967 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
41973 try searching with the regexp
41974 \begin_inset Newline newline
41988 \begin_inset Newline newline
41991 in order to find word repetitions,
41995 \begin_layout Standard
41996 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) fully implemented.
41999 \begin_layout Standard
42000 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42009 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp,
42010 and when occurring in multiple different regexps,
42011 where the numbering of back-referenced sub-expressions is absolute.
42013 \begin_inset space ~
42017 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
42020 always refers to the first occurrence of
42021 \begin_inset Formula $()$
42024 in all entered regexps.
42032 \begin_layout Section
42034 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42036 name "sec:Spellchecking"
42041 \begin_inset Index idx
42046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42055 \begin_layout Standard
42057 has a built-in spell checker.
42060 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42068 key or the toolbar button
42071 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
42074 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the beginning of the currently selected text.
42075 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found,
42076 allowing you to edit and replace it in a second line.
42077 Whenever an unknown word is found,
42078 the word is highlighted and the text scrolled so that it is visible.
42079 In the spellchecker sidebar,
42080 there is a box showing suggestions for a correction,
42081 if any could be found.
42082 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
42087 double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
42088 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
42091 \begin_layout Standard
42093 the dictionary file used is determined by the document language that is set in the
42095 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42099 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing a different one at the top of the dialog.
42101 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
42102 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
42105 \begin_inset space ~
42113 arg "dialog-show character"
42116 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
42118 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
42121 \begin_layout Standard
42122 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
42123 can be downloaded from here:
42124 \begin_inset Newline newline
42128 \begin_inset Flex URL
42131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42133 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/dictionaries/dicts/
42139 \begin_inset Newline newline
42142 You should download 2
42143 \begin_inset space ~
42146 files for each language (use
42150 link at the end of the opened webpage).
42151 To install a dictionary on Windows,
42153 \begin_inset space ~
42156 files into \SpecialChar LyX
42157 's installation subfolder
42165 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
42167 \begin_inset Newline newline
42170 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
42171 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
42172 but in most cases these are
42192 is the language code.
42195 \begin_layout Subsection
42199 \begin_layout Standard
42202 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42203 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42205 \begin_inset space ~
42208 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42211 you can set the following things:
42214 \begin_layout Description
42216 \begin_inset space ~
42219 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
42220 should use for spell checking.
42221 Depending on your platform,
42232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42233 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
42234 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
42249 \begin_inset space ~
42252 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
42255 \begin_layout Description
42257 \begin_inset space ~
42260 language If this field is not empty,
42262 will always use the given language for the spell checking,
42263 no matter what the document language is.
42266 \begin_layout Description
42268 \begin_inset space ~
42271 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker should escape,
42273 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42277 \begin_inset space \space{}
42281 This should normally not be needed.
42284 \begin_layout Description
42286 \begin_inset space ~
42290 \begin_inset space ~
42293 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words like
42294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42304 \begin_layout Description
42306 \begin_inset space ~
42309 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
42310 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
42311 By right-clicking on an underlined word,
42312 suggestions from the spellchecker appear in a context menu.
42313 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested word.
42316 \begin_layout Description
42318 \begin_inset space ~
42322 \begin_inset space ~
42326 \begin_inset space ~
42329 comments If enabled,
42330 the spelling of non-printed document content is checked as well.
42333 \begin_layout Section
42335 \begin_inset Index idx
42340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42347 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42349 name "sec:Thesaurus"
42356 \begin_layout Standard
42358 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
42359 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice,
42360 OpenOffice and Firefox (namely the
42368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42369 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42371 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
42382 which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
42386 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
42387 which are available for many languages.
42390 \begin_layout Standard
42391 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for the use with \SpecialChar LyX
42395 \begin_layout Subsection
42396 Setting up the thesaurus
42399 \begin_layout Standard
42408 thesauri consist of two files per language:
42409 A file with the suffix
42413 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
42418 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language (e.
42419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42423 \begin_inset space ~
42432 the US English files are named:
42435 \begin_layout Itemize
42439 \begin_layout Itemize
42443 \begin_layout Standard
42452 and its thesaurus installed,
42453 these files should be already on your system and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
42456 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42457 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42458 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
42460 \begin_inset space ~
42465 ) to the path where they are installed.
42469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42471 depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionaries,
42472 typical locations are
42479 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
42484 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
42489 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
42493 dictionaries are to be found at
42499 LibreOffice-<Version>
42507 the default location is
42509 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
42510 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
42511 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
42512 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
42513 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
42514 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
42523 you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation during the \SpecialChar LyX
42524 installation process,
42525 which will then be installed in the correct place right away.
42528 \begin_layout Standard
42529 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
42530 updated thesaurus dictionaries,
42531 you can download them from here:
42532 \begin_inset Newline newline
42536 \begin_inset Flex URL
42539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42541 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
42549 \begin_layout Standard
42550 To install a new dictionary,
42551 download the two files for this dictionary into the thesaurus path (which is set in
42553 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42554 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42555 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
42557 \begin_inset space ~
42562 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
42564 If this path is not defined yet,
42565 you can use a dictionary of your choice and point \SpecialChar LyX
42569 \begin_layout Standard
42571 you can also install new dictionaries via
42573 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
42578 via your package manager (look for
42584 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
42588 make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
42589 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
42591 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42597 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42598 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42599 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
42601 \begin_inset space ~
42606 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
42609 \begin_layout Subsection
42610 Using the thesaurus
42613 \begin_layout Standard
42614 To start the thesaurus,
42617 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42620 or the toolbar button
42623 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42626 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is selected.
42627 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as a replacement.
42628 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
42630 for some languages (such as English),
42631 the thesaurus does not only show equivalent words (synonyms),
42632 but also generic terms (such as
42641 related terms (such as
42644 \begin_inset space ~
42657 \begin_inset space ~
42667 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
42677 related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
42680 \begin_layout Standard
42681 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor,
42682 but you can also switch it in the dialog,
42683 as you can enter new words to look up directly there.
42686 \begin_layout Standard
42687 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in the dictionary,
42693 and you have to use the so called lemma form,
42695 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42699 \begin_inset space \space{}
42702 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages:
42703 first person singular indicative active for nouns,
42704 infinitive for verbs).
42706 looking up the word form
42711 while results are shown for the word form
42716 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
42717 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42721 \begin_inset space \space{}
42733 then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in the dialog,
42734 and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted part will be replaced;
42735 thus the ending remains).
42738 \begin_layout Section
42740 \begin_inset Index idx
42745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42752 \begin_inset Index idx
42757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42759 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42774 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42776 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
42783 \begin_layout Standard
42784 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
42785 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
42786 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
42788 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42790 \begin_inset space ~
42793 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42795 \begin_inset space ~
42803 \begin_layout Standard
42804 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
42819 The color depends on the author that made the change.
42820 You can change the color in
42822 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42823 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42825 \begin_inset space ~
42829 \begin_inset space ~
42834 \SpecialChar menuseparator
42840 \begin_inset Index idx
42845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42847 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42861 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
42862 's status bar when the cursor is in changed text.
42863 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
42866 arg "changes-merge"
42872 \begin_layout Standard
42873 When change tracking is activated,
42874 you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
42876 \begin_inset Index idx
42881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42883 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42900 \begin_layout Standard
42901 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42907 \begin_layout Standard
42908 \begin_inset Graphics
42909 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
42917 \begin_layout Standard
42918 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42924 \begin_layout Standard
42925 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
42928 \begin_layout Standard
42929 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42935 \begin_layout Standard
42936 \begin_inset Tabular
42937 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
42938 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42939 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42940 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42941 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42950 arg "changes-track"
42958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42964 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42966 \begin_inset space ~
42969 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42971 \begin_inset space ~
42980 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42989 arg "changes-output"
42997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43003 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43005 \begin_inset space ~
43008 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
43010 \begin_inset space ~
43014 \begin_inset space ~
43018 \begin_inset space ~
43027 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43048 Jumps to the next change
43054 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43063 arg "change-accept"
43071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43077 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43079 \begin_inset space ~
43082 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
43084 \begin_inset space ~
43093 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43102 arg "change-reject"
43110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43116 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43118 \begin_inset space ~
43121 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
43123 \begin_inset space ~
43132 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43141 arg "changes-merge"
43149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43155 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43157 \begin_inset space ~
43160 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
43162 \begin_inset space ~
43171 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43180 arg "all-changes-accept"
43188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43194 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43196 \begin_inset space ~
43199 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
43201 \begin_inset space ~
43205 \begin_inset space ~
43214 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43223 arg "all-changes-reject"
43231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43237 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43239 \begin_inset space ~
43242 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
43244 \begin_inset space ~
43248 \begin_inset space ~
43257 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43280 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43281 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
43283 \begin_inset space ~
43292 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43315 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43317 \begin_inset space ~
43333 \begin_layout Standard
43334 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43340 \begin_layout Standard
43341 Not all changes are (yet) visualized,
43342 especially no format changes like from
43361 \begin_layout Standard
43362 The review toolbar helps you to accept,
43364 or merge changes – highlight the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
43365 When you merge changes,
43366 a window pops up showing you information about the next change after the current cursor position.
43367 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
43368 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and step to the next change.
43369 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
43372 \begin_layout Standard
43373 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important to describe a change.
43376 \begin_layout Section
43377 Comparison of Documents
43378 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43380 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
43385 \begin_inset Index idx
43390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43391 Comparison of documents
43399 \begin_layout Standard
43400 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
43403 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43407 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
43408 file with change tracking enabled showing the differences.
43409 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
43410 should take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
43413 \begin_inset space ~
43417 \begin_inset space ~
43421 \begin_inset space ~
43430 \begin_inset space ~
43434 \begin_inset space ~
43438 \begin_inset space ~
43442 \begin_inset space ~
43446 \begin_inset space ~
43450 \begin_inset space ~
43455 enables the change tracking option
43458 \begin_inset space ~
43462 \begin_inset space ~
43466 \begin_inset space ~
43471 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
43474 \begin_layout Section
43475 International Support
43476 \begin_inset Index idx
43481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43482 International support
43490 \begin_layout Standard
43491 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
43492 with any language you want.
43493 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
43496 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43498 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
43506 \begin_layout Standard
43509 also supports phonetic symbols,
43511 \begin_inset space ~
43515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43517 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
43525 \begin_layout Subsection
43527 \begin_inset Index idx
43532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43534 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43549 \begin_inset Index idx
43554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43556 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43571 \begin_inset Index idx
43576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43578 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43595 \begin_layout Standard
43598 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43599 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43602 dialog lets you set
43605 the quote style and character encoding
43610 \begin_layout Standard
43615 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43620 \begin_inset space ~
43625 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
43626 For details about the different encoding options see section
43627 \begin_inset space ~
43631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43633 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
43641 \begin_layout Subsection
43642 Keyboard mapping configuration
43643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43645 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
43652 \begin_layout Standard
43653 If you have for example a U.
43654 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43657 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English,
43658 you can use an alternate keymap.
43660 if you want to write in Italian,
43661 you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
43662 to use an Italian keymap.
43665 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43666 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43667 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
43670 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings,
43672 \begin_inset space ~
43676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43678 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
43684 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select which one you want to use.
43687 \begin_layout Standard
43689 you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely different keymap (for Vulcan,
43693 normally write in Italian on a U.
43694 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43697 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
43699 you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing one to support the characters you want.
43700 This and many other customizations are explained in the
43707 \begin_layout Chapter
43710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43712 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
43719 \begin_layout Standard
43720 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
43721 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special topic inside the user's guide.
43724 \begin_layout Section
43726 \begin_inset Index idx
43731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43733 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43750 \begin_layout Standard
43755 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
43758 \begin_layout Subsection
43762 \begin_layout Standard
43763 Creates a new document.
43766 \begin_layout Subsection
43770 \begin_layout Standard
43771 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
43772 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for the document,
43773 features you would otherwise need to change manually.
43775 templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring writing tasks.
43778 \begin_layout Subsection
43782 \begin_layout Standard
43786 \begin_layout Subsection
43790 \begin_layout Standard
43791 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
43792 Click there on a file to open it.
43795 \begin_layout Subsection
43799 \begin_layout Standard
43800 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
43804 \begin_layout Subsection
43808 \begin_layout Standard
43809 Closes the current document.
43812 \begin_layout Subsection
43816 \begin_layout Standard
43817 Closes all opened documents.
43820 \begin_layout Subsection
43824 \begin_layout Standard
43825 Saves the actual document.
43828 \begin_layout Subsection
43832 \begin_layout Standard
43833 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
43836 \begin_layout Subsection
43840 \begin_layout Standard
43841 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use as a template.
43844 \begin_layout Subsection
43848 \begin_layout Standard
43849 Saves all opened documents.
43852 \begin_layout Subsection
43856 \begin_layout Standard
43857 Reloads the actual document from disk.
43860 \begin_layout Subsection
43864 \begin_layout Standard
43865 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
43866 It is described in the section
43868 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
43873 Additional Features
43878 \begin_layout Subsection
43882 \begin_layout Standard
43883 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
43889 plain text files and comma separated,
43890 table-like text files (CSV).
43891 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
43895 \begin_layout Standard
43896 When using the menu entry
43899 \begin_inset space ~
43905 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph;
43906 when using the menu entry
43909 \begin_inset space ~
43913 \begin_inset space ~
43917 \begin_inset space ~
43923 consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
43924 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
43927 \begin_layout Subsection
43929 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43931 name "subsec:Export"
43938 \begin_layout Standard
43939 You can export your document to various file formats.
43940 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
43942 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
43943 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
43944 during its configuration.
43947 \begin_layout Standard
43948 Here is a list of all available entries;
43949 some of them are explained in detail in section
43950 \begin_inset space ~
43954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43956 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43964 \begin_layout Description
43970 \begin_inset space ~
43973 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
43975 \begin_inset space ~
43978 1.4.x versions for Chinese,
43979 Japanese and Korean (CJK)
43980 \begin_inset Newline newline
43983 Since \SpecialChar LyX
43984 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
43988 \begin_layout Description
43989 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup language
43994 \begin_layout Description
43996 \begin_inset space ~
43999 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup language
44004 \begin_layout Description
44005 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
44006 's native DVI-format.
44007 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in files paths or file names in your document.
44009 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
44016 \begin_layout Description
44017 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces in files paths or file names
44020 \begin_layout Description
44022 \begin_inset space ~
44029 ) DVI-format using the program
44031 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44035 supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
44040 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44049 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
44057 \begin_layout Description
44059 \begin_inset space ~
44062 (cropped) the same as
44066 but with cropped page margins.
44069 \begin_layout Description
44071 \begin_inset space ~
44074 Dot text file with code in the programming language
44078 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
44083 \begin_layout Description
44088 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44097 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
44105 \begin_layout Description
44107 \begin_inset space ~
44111 \begin_inset space ~
44114 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
44119 as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and not in the format
44126 \begin_layout Description
44130 \begin_inset space ~
44139 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44140 source that is compilable with the program
44142 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44146 \begin_layout Description
44150 \begin_inset space ~
44155 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44157 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to a format that is readable by the
44167 \begin_layout Description
44171 \begin_inset space ~
44176 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44178 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to the EPS-format,
44179 only this format is readable by the
44186 \begin_layout Description
44190 \begin_inset space ~
44199 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44200 source that is compilable with the program
44206 \begin_layout Description
44208 \begin_inset space ~
44212 \begin_inset space ~
44219 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44220 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation software
44225 \begin_layout Description
44227 \begin_inset space ~
44230 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
44231 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
44233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44237 \begin_inset space \space{}
44242 \begin_inset space ~
44247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44262 represent the version number)
44265 \begin_layout Description
44267 \begin_inset space ~
44271 \begin_inset space ~
44274 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary to compile it (images,
44276 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44281 \begin_layout Description
44282 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
44283 's internal XHTML engine
44286 \begin_layout Description
44288 \begin_inset space ~
44292 \begin_inset space ~
44296 \begin_inset space ~
44300 \begin_inset space ~
44303 XML Office Open XML file,
44309 For the conversion the program
44318 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
44321 \begin_layout Description
44322 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
44327 \begin_layout Description
44329 \begin_inset space ~
44332 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file,
44342 For the conversion the program
44351 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
44354 \begin_layout Description
44356 \begin_inset space ~
44359 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
44360 For the conversion the program
44369 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
44372 \begin_layout Description
44374 \begin_inset space ~
44377 (cropped) the same as
44380 \begin_inset space ~
44385 but with cropped page margins
44388 \begin_layout Description
44392 \begin_inset space ~
44397 PDF-format using the program
44402 produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
44405 \begin_layout Description
44409 \begin_inset space ~
44413 \begin_inset space ~
44421 \begin_inset space ~
44426 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
44427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44431 \begin_inset space \space{}
44434 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermediate preview)
44437 \begin_layout Description
44441 \begin_inset space ~
44446 PDF-format using the program
44448 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44452 produces PDF-files directly
44455 \begin_layout Description
44459 \begin_inset space ~
44464 PDF-format using the program
44469 produces PDF-files directly
44472 \begin_layout Description
44476 \begin_inset space ~
44481 PDF-format using the program
44486 produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
44489 \begin_layout Description
44493 \begin_inset space ~
44498 PDF-format using the program
44504 produces PDF-files directly
44507 \begin_layout Description
44511 \begin_inset space ~
44519 \begin_layout Description
44523 \begin_inset space ~
44527 \begin_inset space ~
44533 the document will first be converted to Postscript format and then exported as text using the program
44538 \begin_layout Description
44543 PostScript format using the program
44552 options see section
44553 \begin_inset space ~
44557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44559 reference "subsec:General-output"
44567 \begin_layout Description
44568 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44569 source and also code in the statistical programming language
44582 it is possible to use
44586 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
44590 \begin_layout Standard
44591 If one of the menu entries
44599 \begin_inset space ~
44609 you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44611 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
44614 \begin_inset space ~
44618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44620 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
44626 \begin_inset Index idx
44631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44632 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
44641 \begin_layout Subsection
44645 \begin_layout Standard
44646 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
44649 \begin_inset space ~
44653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44655 reference "sec:Paths"
44661 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
44670 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
44671 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
44672 's preferences as described in section
44673 \begin_inset space ~
44677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44679 reference "subsec:Converters"
44687 \begin_layout Subsection
44688 New and Close Window
44691 \begin_layout Standard
44692 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
44696 \begin_layout Subsection
44700 \begin_layout Standard
44701 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
44704 \begin_layout Section
44706 \begin_inset Index idx
44711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44713 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44730 \begin_layout Subsection
44734 \begin_layout Standard
44735 Described in section
44736 \begin_inset space ~
44740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44742 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
44750 \begin_layout Subsection
44758 \begin_layout Standard
44759 Described in section
44760 \begin_inset space ~
44764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44766 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
44774 \begin_layout Subsection
44778 \begin_layout Standard
44779 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
44780 If the cursor is outside an inset,
44781 the whole document will be selected.
44784 \begin_layout Subsection
44788 \begin_layout Standard
44789 Selects the whole document.
44792 \begin_layout Subsection
44793 Find & Replace (Quick)
44796 \begin_layout Standard
44797 Described in section
44798 \begin_inset space ~
44802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44804 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
44812 \begin_layout Subsection
44813 Find & Replace (Advanced)
44816 \begin_layout Standard
44817 Described in section
44818 \begin_inset space ~
44822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44824 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
44832 \begin_layout Subsection
44833 Move Paragraph Up/Down
44836 \begin_layout Standard
44837 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph up or down.
44840 \begin_layout Subsection
44842 \begin_inset Index idx
44847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44849 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44866 \begin_layout Standard
44867 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment,
44868 line spacing and label width.
44869 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently in.
44872 \begin_layout Standard
44873 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you have chosen to separate paragraphs with
44879 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44880 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44882 \begin_inset space ~
44890 \begin_layout Subsection
44894 \begin_layout Standard
44895 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text passages.
44899 \begin_layout Enumerate
44900 Customize text properties by means of the
44906 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
44910 this is described in section
44911 \begin_inset space ~
44915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44917 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
44925 \begin_layout Enumerate
44926 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
44928 Apply last settings
44931 \begin_layout Enumerate
44932 Change the casing of selected text (
44949 \begin_layout Subsection
44953 \begin_layout Standard
44954 This sub-menu only appears if the document class or a module provides custom text styles (in the case of this document:
44980 \begin_inset space ~
44984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44986 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
44994 \begin_layout Subsection
44995 Table and Rows & Columns
44998 \begin_layout Standard
44999 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
45000 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells,
45001 add or remove borders of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
45004 \begin_layout Subsection
45008 \begin_layout Standard
45009 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
45010 It will dissolve this inset.
45011 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
45014 \begin_layout Subsection
45018 \begin_layout Standard
45019 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
45020 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
45023 \begin_layout Subsection
45024 Increase/Decrease List Depth
45027 \begin_layout Standard
45028 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can be nested.
45029 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
45030 \begin_inset space ~
45034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45036 reference "sec:Nesting"
45042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45044 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
45052 \begin_layout Section
45054 \begin_inset Index idx
45059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45061 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45078 \begin_layout Standard
45079 At the bottom of the
45083 menu the opened documents are listed.
45086 \begin_layout Subsection
45087 Open/Close all Insets
45090 \begin_layout Standard
45091 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
45094 \begin_layout Subsection
45095 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
45098 \begin_layout Standard
45099 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
45102 \begin_layout Standard
45103 Math macros are described in the
45110 \begin_layout Subsection
45114 \begin_layout Standard
45115 Shows the outline window as described in sections
45116 \begin_inset space ~
45120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45122 reference "sec:Navigating"
45128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45130 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
45138 \begin_layout Subsection
45142 \begin_layout Standard
45143 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document,
45144 as described in section
45145 \begin_inset space ~
45149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45151 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
45159 \begin_layout Subsection
45163 \begin_layout Standard
45164 Opens a window showing console messages.
45165 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
45167 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45171 hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background while \SpecialChar LaTeX
45172 is processing the document.
45175 \begin_layout Subsection
45177 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45179 name "subsec:Toolbars"
45184 \begin_inset Index idx
45189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45198 \begin_layout Standard
45199 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different toolbars.
45200 All toolbars and the
45203 \begin_inset space ~
45221 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
45224 \begin_layout Standard
45228 \begin_inset space ~
45247 \begin_inset space ~
45260 \begin_inset space ~
45265 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
45270 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets you select
45287 \begin_layout Standard
45292 state the toolbar is permanently shown,
45297 state it is never shown;
45302 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment or when a certain feature is enabled.
45303 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking is activated,
45304 the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor is inside a formula or table respectively,
45305 the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment.
45308 \begin_layout Standard
45310 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
45311 \begin_inset space ~
45315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45317 reference "sec:Toolbars"
45325 \begin_layout Subsection
45329 \begin_layout Standard
45333 \begin_inset space ~
45337 \begin_inset space ~
45341 \begin_inset space ~
45345 \begin_inset space ~
45349 \begin_inset space ~
45353 \begin_inset space ~
45358 will split \SpecialChar LyX
45359 's main window vertically while
45362 \begin_inset space ~
45366 \begin_inset space ~
45370 \begin_inset space ~
45374 \begin_inset space ~
45378 \begin_inset space ~
45382 \begin_inset space ~
45387 will split it horizontally.
45388 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them,
45389 or to view the same document,
45390 but at different positions.
45391 You can even split the main window several times to view,
45393 three or more documents at the same time.
45394 To close a split view,
45398 \begin_inset space ~
45402 \begin_inset space ~
45410 \begin_layout Subsection
45414 \begin_layout Standard
45415 Closes a split view.
45418 \begin_layout Subsection
45422 \begin_layout Standard
45423 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars so that you will see nothing but your text.
45424 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
45425 's main window fullscreen.
45426 To return from fullscreen to the normal view,
45428 or right-click and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
45431 \begin_layout Section
45433 \begin_inset Index idx
45438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45440 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45457 \begin_layout Subsection
45461 \begin_layout Standard
45462 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
45463 \begin_inset space ~
45467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45469 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
45481 \begin_layout Subsection
45483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45485 name "subsec:Special-Character"
45492 \begin_layout Standard
45493 Here you can insert the following characters:
45496 \begin_layout Description
45501 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45503 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
45504 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45505 -packages you have installed.
45506 You can get a complete display by checking
45509 \begin_inset space ~
45515 \begin_inset Newline newline
45519 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45528 Not all characters will be visible in the
45532 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences dialog (see section
45533 \begin_inset space ~
45537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45539 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
45544 ) can display every character.
45552 \begin_layout Description
45553 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis:
45558 \begin_layout Description
45560 \begin_inset space ~
45564 \begin_inset space ~
45567 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
45568 \begin_inset space ~
45572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45574 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
45582 \begin_layout Description
45584 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109674
45586 \begin_inset space ~
45590 \begin_inset space ~
45594 \change_deleted -584632292 1712109675
45596 \begin_inset space ~
45602 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109680
45604 \begin_inset space ~
45608 \change_deleted -584632292 1712109681
45611 Inserts this quote:
45613 no matter what quote style you selected in the
45615 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45616 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45622 \begin_layout Description
45624 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109701
45626 \begin_inset space ~
45630 \begin_inset space ~
45634 \begin_inset space ~
45637 Mark Inserts this quote:
45639 \begin_inset Quotes qls
45643 no matter what quote style you have selected.
45646 \begin_layout Description
45648 \change_deleted -584632292 1712109722
45650 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109720
45654 \begin_inset space ~
45658 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109726
45660 \begin_inset space ~
45664 \change_deleted -584632292 1712109727
45668 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109731
45672 \change_deleted -584632292 1712109733
45676 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109738
45677 (usually a single quote)
45679 in the quotation marks style selected in the
45681 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45682 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45688 \begin_layout Description
45690 \begin_inset space ~
45693 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that prevents automatic line breaks:
45694 \SpecialChar nobreakdash
45698 \begin_layout Description
45700 \begin_inset space ~
45703 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur:
45704 \SpecialChar breakableslash
45708 \begin_layout Description
45710 \begin_inset space ~
45713 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
45715 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45719 \begin_inset space \space{}
45722 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
45723 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
45730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45733 To insert a fraction use the command
45738 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
45742 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
45748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45751 The visible space is hereby the character before the
45758 \begin_layout Description
45760 \begin_inset space ~
45763 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign:
45764 \SpecialChar menuseparator
45768 \begin_layout Description
45770 \begin_inset space ~
45774 \begin_inset Index idx
45779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45786 \begin_inset Index idx
45791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45793 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45807 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these symbols.
45808 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45814 \begin_inset Index idx
45819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45822 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45837 \begin_inset Newline newline
45840 More information about this feature can be found in the
45846 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45852 \begin_layout Description
45853 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
45858 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
45862 \begin_layout Subsection
45866 \begin_layout Standard
45867 Opens a submenu with the following options:
45870 \begin_layout Description
45871 Superscript Inserts a superscript:
45873 \begin_inset script superscript
45875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45885 \begin_layout Description
45886 Subscript Inserts a subscript:
45888 \begin_inset script subscript
45890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45899 \begin_layout Description
45901 \begin_inset space ~
45904 Space Inserts a non-breaking space as described in section
45905 \begin_inset space ~
45909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45911 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
45919 \begin_layout Description
45921 \begin_inset space ~
45924 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
45925 \begin_inset space ~
45929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45931 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
45939 \begin_layout Description
45941 \begin_inset space ~
45944 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
45945 \begin_inset space ~
45949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45951 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
45959 \begin_layout Description
45961 \begin_inset space ~
45964 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
45965 \begin_inset space ~
45969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45971 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
45979 \begin_layout Description
45981 \begin_inset space ~
45984 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
45985 \begin_inset space ~
45989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45991 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
45999 \begin_layout Description
46001 \begin_inset space ~
46004 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
46005 \begin_inset space ~
46009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46011 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
46019 \begin_layout Description
46020 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
46021 \begin_inset space ~
46025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46027 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
46035 \begin_layout Description
46037 \begin_inset space ~
46040 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
46041 \begin_inset space ~
46045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46047 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
46055 \begin_layout Description
46057 \begin_inset space ~
46060 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
46061 \begin_inset space ~
46065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46067 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
46075 \begin_layout Description
46077 \begin_inset space ~
46081 \begin_inset space ~
46084 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible in the output.
46086 \begin_inset space ~
46090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46092 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
46100 for a usage example.
46103 \begin_layout Description
46105 \begin_inset space ~
46109 \begin_inset space ~
46112 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
46113 \begin_inset space ~
46117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46119 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
46127 \begin_layout Description
46129 \begin_inset space ~
46132 Break Inserts a forced line break that justifies the remaining text as described in section
46133 \begin_inset space ~
46137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46139 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
46147 \begin_layout Description
46149 \begin_inset space ~
46152 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
46153 \begin_inset space ~
46157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46159 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
46167 \begin_layout Description
46169 \begin_inset space ~
46172 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page,
46173 as described in section
46174 \begin_inset space ~
46178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46180 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
46188 \begin_layout Description
46190 \begin_inset space ~
46194 \begin_inset space ~
46197 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
46198 to prevent a page break at the given position.
46200 \begin_inset space ~
46204 \begin_inset space ~
46208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46210 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
46218 \begin_layout Description
46220 \begin_inset space ~
46223 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
46224 \begin_inset space ~
46228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46230 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
46238 \begin_layout Description
46240 \begin_inset space ~
46244 \begin_inset space ~
46247 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
46248 \begin_inset space ~
46252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46254 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
46262 \begin_layout Subsection
46266 \begin_layout Standard
46267 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
46268 The submenu allows you to insert
46271 \begin_layout Description
46273 \begin_inset space ~
46276 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
46279 \begin_layout Description
46281 \begin_inset space ~
46285 \begin_inset space ~
46288 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last save)
46291 \begin_layout Description
46293 \begin_inset space ~
46296 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
46299 \begin_layout Description
46301 \begin_inset space ~
46304 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
46307 \begin_layout Description
46309 \begin_inset space ~
46313 \begin_inset space ~
46316 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last save)
46319 \begin_layout Description
46321 \begin_inset space ~
46324 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
46327 \begin_layout Description
46329 \begin_inset space ~
46333 \begin_inset space ~
46337 \begin_inset space ~
46340 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
46343 \begin_layout Description
46345 \begin_inset space ~
46349 \begin_inset space ~
46352 Revision inserts the version control reference number (e.g.
46354 This submenu does not appear if the file is not under version control
46357 \begin_layout Description
46359 \begin_inset space ~
46362 Name inserts the user name as specified in
46364 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46365 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46371 \begin_layout Description
46373 \begin_inset space ~
46376 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
46378 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46379 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46385 \begin_layout Description
46386 Other\SpecialChar ldots
46387 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
46390 \begin_layout Subsection
46393 List/Contents/References
46396 \begin_layout Standard
46397 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
46401 \begin_inset space ~
46425 are described in section
46426 \begin_inset space ~
46430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46432 reference "sec:toc"
46442 is described in section
46443 \begin_inset space ~
46447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46449 reference "sec:Index"
46459 is described in section
46460 \begin_inset space ~
46464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46466 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
46473 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46476 is described in section
46477 \begin_inset space ~
46481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46483 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
46491 \begin_layout Subsection
46495 \begin_layout Standard
46497 as described in section
46498 \begin_inset space ~
46502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46504 reference "sec:Floats"
46509 and in detail the chapter
46516 \begin_inset space ~
46524 \begin_layout Subsection
46528 \begin_layout Standard
46530 described in section
46531 \begin_inset space ~
46535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46537 reference "sec:Notes"
46545 \begin_layout Subsection
46549 \begin_layout Standard
46550 Inserts a branch inset,
46552 and allowing you to create and insert a new branch.
46553 Branches are described in section
46554 \begin_inset space ~
46558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46560 reference "sec:Branches"
46568 \begin_layout Subsection
46572 \begin_layout Standard
46573 Inserts document class-specific insets.
46574 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain document class.
46575 An example is the document class
46579 with three custom insets.
46582 Flex insets and InsetLayout
46586 Installing New Document Classes,
46587 The Layout file format
46593 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
46596 \begin_layout Subsection
46598 \begin_inset Index idx
46603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46612 \begin_layout Standard
46613 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files in your document.
46614 For more information see chapter
46616 External Document Parts
46619 \begin_inset space ~
46625 \begin_layout Subsection
46627 \begin_inset Index idx
46632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46641 \begin_layout Standard
46642 Inserts a box in a certain style.
46643 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
46650 \begin_inset space ~
46658 \begin_layout Subsection
46662 \begin_layout Standard
46667 dialog as described in section
46668 \begin_inset space ~
46672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46674 reference "sec:Bibliography"
46682 \begin_layout Subsection
46686 \begin_layout Standard
46691 as described in section
46692 \begin_inset space ~
46696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46698 reference "sec:Cross-References"
46706 \begin_layout Subsection
46710 \begin_layout Standard
46715 as described in section
46716 \begin_inset space ~
46720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46722 reference "sec:Cross-References"
46730 \begin_layout Subsection
46732 \begin_inset Index idx
46737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46744 \begin_inset Index idx
46749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46751 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46761 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46778 \begin_layout Standard
46779 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
46780 Floats are described in section
46781 \begin_inset space ~
46785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46787 reference "sec:Floats"
46793 captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
46795 Multi-page Table Captions
46800 \begin_inset space ~
46808 \begin_layout Subsection
46812 \begin_layout Standard
46813 Inserts an index entry as described in section
46814 \begin_inset space ~
46818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46820 reference "sec:Index"
46828 \begin_layout Subsection
46832 \begin_layout Standard
46833 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
46834 \begin_inset space ~
46838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46840 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
46848 \begin_layout Subsection
46852 \begin_layout Standard
46853 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
46854 Tables are described in section
46855 \begin_inset space ~
46859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46861 reference "sec:Tables"
46866 and in detail in the chapter
46873 \begin_inset space ~
46881 \begin_layout Subsection
46885 \begin_layout Standard
46891 Graphics are described in section
46892 \begin_inset space ~
46896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46898 reference "sec:Graphics"
46906 \begin_layout Subsection
46910 \begin_layout Standard
46911 Inserts a URL as described in section
46912 \begin_inset space ~
46916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46918 reference "subsec:URLs"
46926 \begin_layout Subsection
46930 \begin_layout Standard
46931 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
46932 \begin_inset space ~
46936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46938 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
46946 \begin_layout Subsection
46950 \begin_layout Standard
46951 Inserts a footnote as described in section
46952 \begin_inset space ~
46956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46958 reference "sec:Footnotes"
46966 \begin_layout Subsection
46970 \begin_layout Standard
46971 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
46972 \begin_inset space ~
46976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46978 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
46986 \begin_layout Subsection
46989 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
46992 \begin_layout Standard
46993 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
46995 \begin_inset space ~
46999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47001 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
47006 for an explanation.
47009 \begin_layout Subsection
47013 \begin_layout Standard
47014 Is only visible if the cursor is in front,
47015 in or behind a section heading,
47016 title or caption of a float.
47017 Inserts a short title as described in section
47018 \begin_inset space ~
47022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47024 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
47032 \begin_layout Subsection
47037 \begin_layout Standard
47038 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
47039 Code box as described in section
47040 \begin_inset space ~
47044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47046 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
47054 \begin_layout Subsection
47056 \begin_inset Index idx
47061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47070 \begin_layout Standard
47071 Inserts a program listings box.
47072 Program listings are explained in the chapter
47074 Program Code Listings
47079 \begin_inset space ~
47087 \begin_layout Subsection
47091 \begin_layout Standard
47092 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
47093 \begin_inset space ~
47097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47099 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
47107 \begin_layout Section
47109 \begin_inset Index idx
47114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47116 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47133 \begin_layout Standard
47134 This menu lists the existing chapters,
47139 \begin_inset space ~
47142 of the current document.
47143 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
47146 \begin_layout Subsection
47150 \begin_layout Standard
47151 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
47152 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have to jump,
47155 \begin_inset space ~
47159 To create bookmarks for this example,
47161 \begin_inset space ~
47164 2.5 and use the submenu
47167 \begin_inset space ~
47171 \begin_inset space ~
47178 \begin_inset space ~
47184 \begin_inset space ~
47188 \begin_inset space ~
47194 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by the key bindings
47197 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
47203 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
47206 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
47209 \begin_layout Standard
47213 \begin_inset space ~
47218 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
47221 \begin_inset space ~
47226 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
47229 \begin_layout Subsection
47235 \begin_layout Standard
47236 Jump to the next note,
47238 or cross-reference after the current cursor position.
47241 \begin_layout Subsection
47245 \begin_layout Standard
47246 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
47247 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
47248 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
47251 \begin_inset space ~
47255 \begin_inset space ~
47263 \begin_layout Subsection
47267 \begin_layout Standard
47268 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
47271 The \SpecialChar LyX
47272 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
47274 \begin_inset space ~
47282 \begin_inset space ~
47287 manual for a detailed description.
47290 \begin_layout Section
47292 \begin_inset Index idx
47297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47299 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47316 \begin_layout Subsection
47320 \begin_layout Standard
47321 Change Tracking is described in section
47322 \begin_inset space ~
47326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47328 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47336 \begin_layout Subsection
47344 \begin_layout Standard
47345 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
47346 by viewing or exporting a document,
47347 this menu will be enabled.
47348 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47350 You can go to the next error or the next warning,
47352 copy something to the clipboard or update the view.
47353 \begin_inset Newline newline
47356 With the help of the logfile,
47357 experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47361 \begin_layout Standard
47364 Open Containing Directory
47366 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
47367 's temporary folder for the document.
47368 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
47369 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
47370 For example some journals require to send the
47374 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47378 \begin_layout Subsection
47379 Start Appendix Here
47382 \begin_layout Standard
47383 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position as described in section
47384 \begin_inset space ~
47388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47390 reference "sec:Appendices"
47398 \begin_layout Subsection
47400 \begin_inset space ~
47406 \begin_layout Standard
47407 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as default output format for the document (menu
47409 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47410 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47411 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
47413 \begin_inset space ~
47417 \begin_inset space ~
47424 \begin_inset space ~
47428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47430 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
47435 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
47438 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47439 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47441 \begin_inset space ~
47444 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
47446 \begin_inset space ~
47449 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
47451 \begin_inset space ~
47455 \begin_inset space ~
47462 \begin_inset space ~
47466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47468 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47473 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
47474 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
47476 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47477 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47479 \begin_inset space ~
47482 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
47484 \begin_inset space ~
47487 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
47492 \begin_inset space ~
47496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47498 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47504 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
47505 when it is first configured.
47506 The default output format is
47509 \begin_inset space ~
47517 \begin_layout Subsection
47518 View (Other Formats)
47521 \begin_layout Standard
47522 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
47523 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the actual document with an external program.
47524 The menu entries are not the same on all installations —
47525 it depends on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47526 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
47528 All possible formats are listed in section
47529 \begin_inset space ~
47533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47535 reference "subsec:Export"
47541 You should at least see the menu entry
47547 you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47549 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
47551 \begin_inset space ~
47555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47557 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
47563 \begin_inset Index idx
47568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47569 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
47578 \begin_layout Standard
47579 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
47580 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
47582 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47583 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47585 \begin_inset space ~
47588 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
47590 \begin_inset space ~
47593 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
47598 \begin_inset space ~
47602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47604 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47610 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
47611 when it is first configured.
47614 \begin_layout Subsection
47616 \begin_inset space ~
47622 \begin_layout Standard
47623 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
47626 \begin_layout Subsection
47627 Update (Other Formats)
47630 \begin_layout Standard
47631 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of your document without opening a new viewer window.
47634 \begin_layout Subsection
47635 View Master Document
47638 \begin_layout Standard
47639 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
47641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47655 \begin_inset space ~
47660 manual for more information on this topic).
47661 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
47663 if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a book,
47667 \begin_inset space ~
47671 \begin_inset space ~
47676 generates the output of the whole book,
47681 will just output the chapter alone.
47684 \begin_layout Standard
47685 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
47687 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47688 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47689 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
47691 \begin_inset space ~
47695 \begin_inset space ~
47702 \begin_inset space ~
47706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47708 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
47713 ) or in the preferences (menu
47715 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47716 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47718 \begin_inset space ~
47721 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
47723 \begin_inset space ~
47726 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
47728 \begin_inset space ~
47732 \begin_inset space ~
47739 \begin_inset space ~
47743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47745 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47753 \begin_layout Subsection
47754 Update Master Document
47757 \begin_layout Standard
47758 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
47760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47774 \begin_inset space ~
47779 manual for more information on this topic).
47780 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
47783 \begin_layout Standard
47784 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
47786 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47787 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47788 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
47790 \begin_inset space ~
47794 \begin_inset space ~
47801 \begin_inset space ~
47805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47807 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
47812 ) or in the preferences (menu
47814 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47815 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47817 \begin_inset space ~
47820 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
47822 \begin_inset space ~
47825 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
47827 \begin_inset space ~
47831 \begin_inset space ~
47838 \begin_inset space ~
47842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47844 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47852 \begin_layout Subsection
47854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47856 name "subsec:Compressed"
47863 \begin_layout Standard
47864 Un/compresses the current document.
47865 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable compression (see the
47867 Additional Features
47869 manual for details).
47872 \begin_layout Subsection
47876 \begin_layout Standard
47877 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
47880 \begin_layout Subsection
47884 \begin_layout Standard
47885 The document settings are described in appendix
47886 \begin_inset space ~
47890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47892 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
47900 \begin_layout Section
47902 \begin_inset Index idx
47907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47909 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47926 \begin_layout Subsection
47930 \begin_layout Standard
47931 Spell checking is explained in section
47932 \begin_inset space ~
47936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47938 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47946 \begin_layout Subsection
47950 \begin_layout Standard
47951 The thesaurus is described in section
47952 \begin_inset space ~
47956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47958 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
47966 \begin_layout Subsection
47968 \begin_inset Index idx
47973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47980 \begin_inset Index idx
47985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47994 \begin_layout Standard
47995 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted document part.
47998 \begin_layout Subsection
48004 \begin_inset Index idx
48009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48010 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
48019 \begin_layout Standard
48020 Generates with the help of the program
48022 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
48025 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
48026 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
48027 This feature is not available on Windows.
48030 \begin_layout Subsection
48036 \begin_inset Index idx
48041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48051 \begin_layout Standard
48052 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
48057 \begin_inset space ~
48062 to see the full filename paths.
48065 \begin_layout Subsection
48067 \begin_inset Index idx
48072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48081 \begin_layout Standard
48082 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
48083 files as described in section
48084 \begin_inset space ~
48088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48090 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
48098 \begin_layout Subsection
48100 \begin_inset Index idx
48105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48108 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48118 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
48121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48122 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
48134 \begin_inset Index idx
48139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48140 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
48149 \begin_layout Standard
48150 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
48154 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48155 -packages and programs it needs;
48157 \begin_inset space ~
48161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48163 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
48171 \begin_layout Subsection
48175 \begin_layout Standard
48180 dialog as described in detail in appendix
48181 \begin_inset space ~
48185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48187 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
48195 \begin_layout Section
48197 \begin_inset Index idx
48202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48204 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48221 \begin_layout Standard
48222 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
48223 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
48225 If a file is not available in this language,
48226 the English version will be listed.
48229 \begin_layout Standard
48233 \begin_inset space ~
48238 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
48239 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48240 packages and classes found by \SpecialChar LyX
48242 \begin_inset space ~
48246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48248 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
48256 \begin_layout Standard
48260 \begin_inset space ~
48265 gives information about the copyright,
48266 the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
48267 version you are using.
48270 \begin_layout Section
48272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48274 name "sec:Toolbars"
48281 \begin_layout Standard
48282 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
48283 \begin_inset space ~
48287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48289 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
48297 \begin_layout Standard
48298 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
48299 This is described in the
48301 Additional Features
48306 \begin_layout Subsection
48308 \begin_inset Index idx
48313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48315 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48332 \begin_layout Standard
48333 \begin_inset Graphics
48334 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
48342 \begin_layout Standard
48343 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
48349 \begin_layout Standard
48350 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
48354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48366 \begin_inset Note Note
48369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48370 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
48375 manual for more information.
48383 \begin_layout Standard
48384 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
48390 \begin_layout Standard
48391 \begin_inset Tabular
48392 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
48393 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
48394 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48395 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48401 \begin_inset Graphics
48402 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
48412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48416 pull-down box for the environments
48429 \begin_layout Standard
48430 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
48436 \begin_layout Standard
48438 \begin_inset Tabular
48439 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
48440 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
48441 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
48442 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
48443 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48466 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48473 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48496 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48503 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48526 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48533 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48542 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
48550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48556 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48563 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48572 arg "spelling-continuously"
48580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48584 Spellcheck continuously
48590 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48613 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
48620 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48643 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
48650 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48673 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
48680 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48703 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
48710 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48733 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
48738 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
48745 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48754 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
48762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48768 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
48770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48787 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48794 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
48802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48808 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
48810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48827 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48836 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
48844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48850 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48851 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
48858 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48883 arg "dialog-show character"
48892 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48913 Set text to noun style,
48917 arg "dialog-show character"
48926 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48933 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
48941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48947 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
48954 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48974 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48997 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48998 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
49000 \begin_inset space ~
49009 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49018 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
49026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49032 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
49039 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49046 arg "tabular-insert"
49054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49060 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
49067 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49074 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
49082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49088 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
49095 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49104 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
49112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49116 Toggle outline window on/off,
49119 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
49126 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49135 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
49143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49147 Toggle math toolbar on/off
49153 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49162 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
49170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49174 Toggle table toolbar on/off
49187 \begin_layout Subsection
49189 \begin_inset Index idx
49194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49196 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49213 \begin_layout Standard
49214 \begin_inset Graphics
49215 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
49223 \begin_layout Standard
49224 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
49230 \begin_layout Standard
49231 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
49234 \begin_layout Standard
49235 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
49241 \begin_layout Standard
49242 \begin_inset Tabular
49243 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
49244 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
49245 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
49246 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
49247 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49274 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49283 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
49291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49301 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49310 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
49318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49328 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49337 arg "layout-toggle List"
49345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49355 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49364 arg "layout-toggle Description"
49372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49382 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49391 arg "depth-increment"
49399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49405 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49407 \begin_inset space ~
49411 \begin_inset space ~
49420 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49429 arg "depth-decrement"
49437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49443 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49445 \begin_inset space ~
49449 \begin_inset space ~
49458 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49467 arg "float-insert figure"
49475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49481 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
49482 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
49489 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49498 arg "float-insert table"
49506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49512 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
49513 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
49520 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49543 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
49550 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49559 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
49567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49573 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
49580 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49589 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
49597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49603 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
49610 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49633 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
49635 \begin_inset space ~
49644 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49653 arg "nomencl-insert"
49661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49667 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
49669 \begin_inset space ~
49678 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49687 arg "footnote-insert"
49695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49701 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
49708 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49717 arg "marginalnote-insert"
49725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49731 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
49733 \begin_inset space ~
49742 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
49766 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
49768 \begin_inset space ~
49777 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49786 arg "box-insert Frameless"
49794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49800 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
49807 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49830 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
49837 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49860 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
49862 \begin_inset space ~
49871 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49880 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
49888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49894 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
49895 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
49902 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49911 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
49919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49925 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
49926 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49928 \begin_inset space ~
49937 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49946 arg "dialog-show character"
49954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49960 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49962 \begin_inset space ~
49965 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
49972 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49981 arg "textstyle-apply"
49989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49993 Format text using the recent settings in the
49996 arg "dialog-show character"
50005 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50014 arg "layout-paragraph"
50022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50028 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
50030 \begin_inset space ~
50039 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50048 arg "thesaurus-entry"
50056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50062 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50076 \begin_layout Subsection
50077 View/Update Toolbar
50078 \begin_inset Index idx
50083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50085 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50102 \begin_layout Standard
50103 \begin_inset Graphics
50104 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
50111 \begin_layout Standard
50112 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
50118 \begin_layout Standard
50119 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
50122 \begin_layout Standard
50123 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
50129 \begin_layout Standard
50130 \begin_inset Tabular
50131 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
50132 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
50133 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
50134 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
50135 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50158 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50165 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50174 arg "buffer-update"
50182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50188 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50195 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50204 arg "master-buffer-view"
50212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50218 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50220 \begin_inset space ~
50224 \begin_inset space ~
50233 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50242 arg "master-buffer-update"
50250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50256 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50258 \begin_inset space ~
50262 \begin_inset space ~
50271 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50280 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
50288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50294 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50295 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50296 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
50297 Synchronize with Output
50303 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50324 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50325 View (Other Formats)
50331 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
50332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50338 arg "update-others"
50346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
50349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50352 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50353 Update (Other Formats)
50366 \begin_layout Subsection
50370 \begin_layout Standard
50371 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
50372 \begin_inset space ~
50376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50378 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
50385 \begin_inset Index idx
50390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50392 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50409 \begin_inset space ~
50414 manual and the math macro toolbar
50415 \begin_inset Index idx
50420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50422 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50443 \begin_layout Chapter
50444 The Document Settings
50445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50447 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
50452 \begin_inset Index idx
50457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50459 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50476 \begin_layout Standard
50480 \begin_inset space ~
50485 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and is called with the menu
50487 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50491 You can save your document settings as default with the
50493 Save as Document Defaults
50495 button in any dialog.
50496 This will create a template named
50500 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
50501 when you create a new document without using a template.
50504 \begin_layout Standard
50509 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
50510 This affects mostly class options,
50511 the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
50514 \begin_layout Standard
50515 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
50516 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while to find the one you are looking for.
50517 To find a setting quicker,
50518 you can use the search field which is above the submenus of the dialog.
50520 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50524 \begin_inset space \space{}
50528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50536 you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
50537 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
50538 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
50541 \begin_layout Section
50545 \begin_layout Standard
50546 Here you set the document class,
50549 and a master document.
50550 Document classes are described in section
50551 \begin_inset space ~
50555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50557 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
50565 \begin_layout Standard
50569 \begin_inset space ~
50574 you can load you own layout-file,
50575 that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
50580 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
50581 as a layout for a document class.
50582 For more about layout-files,
50585 Installing New Document Classes,
50586 Types of Layout Files
50595 \begin_layout Standard
50596 Some classes use special class options by default.
50597 If this is the case,
50598 they are listed in the field
50602 and you can decide to use them or not.
50603 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for,
50604 it is recommended you leave them untouched.
50609 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
50611 color and page layout packages.
50617 the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50619 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are doing.
50623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50624 When you want to use one of the following drivers
50625 \begin_inset Newline newline
50639 \begin_inset Newline newline
50642 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
50649 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50651 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
50664 \begin_layout Standard
50669 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
50670 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
50671 in the background if the child document is opened without its master.
50672 This way child documents are always compilable.
50673 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
50680 \begin_inset space ~
50688 \begin_layout Standard
50689 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50699 \begin_inset Index idx
50704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50707 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50722 \begin_inset Index idx
50727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50730 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50744 for cross-references,
50746 \begin_inset space ~
50750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50752 reference "sec:Cross-References"
50760 \begin_layout Section
50764 \begin_layout Standard
50765 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
50766 Please refer to the section
50769 \begin_inset space ~
50777 \begin_inset space ~
50782 manual for details.
50785 \begin_layout Section
50789 \begin_layout Standard
50790 Modules are explained in section
50791 \begin_inset space ~
50795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50797 reference "subsec:Modules"
50805 \begin_layout Section
50809 \begin_layout Standard
50811 \begin_inset space ~
50815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50817 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
50825 \begin_layout Section
50829 \begin_layout Standard
50830 The document font settings are described in section
50831 \begin_inset space ~
50835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50837 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
50845 \begin_layout Section
50849 \begin_layout Standard
50850 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
50862 \begin_inset space ~
50867 and whether it should be a
50870 \begin_inset space ~
50875 can also be specified here.
50878 \begin_layout Standard
50879 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
50880 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
50881 That would be impractical,
50883 and is not part of the WYSIWYM concept.
50885 it will be as you specified in the output.
50888 \begin_layout Standard
50891 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
50894 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
50895 justifies the text on screen.
50896 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
50900 \begin_layout Standard
50909 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
50912 \begin_layout Section
50916 \begin_layout Standard
50917 This dialog is described in sections
50918 \begin_inset space ~
50922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50924 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
50930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50932 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
50940 \begin_layout Section
50944 \begin_layout Standard
50945 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
50946 \begin_inset space ~
50950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50952 reference "subsec:Margins"
50960 \begin_layout Section
50962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50964 name "sec:Language-encodings"
50969 \begin_inset Index idx
50974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50976 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50993 \begin_layout Standard
50994 The document language and quote styles are set here.
50995 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
50996 (the \SpecialChar LyX
50997 file is always encoded in utf8).
50998 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
50999 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
51000 -command is not known for a particular character).
51003 \begin_layout Standard
51006 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
51007 files in Unicode – or utf8,
51008 for that matter (which is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
51009 's default encoding).
51010 This should normally fit your needs,
51011 since \SpecialChar LaTeX
51012 's Unicode support covers the characters of most scripts.
51013 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive,
51014 so there might be cases where using one of the traditional,
51016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51024 encodings is necessary.
51027 \begin_layout Standard
51029 provides support for these traditional encodings.
51032 Traditional (auto-selected)
51040 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for the given language(s).If the document contains text in more than one language you thus may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51045 \begin_layout Standard
51047 you can also select
51052 which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
51053 Note that this encoding is then used for
51058 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation below).
51061 \begin_layout Standard
51066 selection in the next dropdown menu does what it states:
51067 it prevents \SpecialChar LyX
51068 from automatically loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51074 \begin_inset Index idx
51079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51082 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51097 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
51099 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
51101 Note that this option is only available for the standard
51107 Traditional (auto-selected)
51112 \begin_layout Standard
51116 \begin_inset space ~
51121 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51122 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation of strings like
51123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51131 The possible settings are:
51134 \begin_layout Description
51135 Default uses the language package that is selected in
51137 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51138 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51142 \begin_inset space ~
51146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51148 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
51156 \begin_layout Description
51157 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export format you will use.
51158 In many cases this will be
51163 \begin_inset Index idx
51168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51171 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51186 If the newer package
51191 \begin_inset Index idx
51196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51199 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51213 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
51214 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
51215 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
51217 this package will be used instead of
51224 \begin_layout Description
51226 \begin_inset space ~
51237 would be more appropriate.
51240 \begin_layout Description
51241 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
51242 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
51246 (for German texts),
51250 \begin_inset Newline newline
51255 usepackage{ngerman}
51258 \begin_layout Description
51259 None will not use a language package.
51260 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
51263 \begin_layout Standard
51265 \change_inserted -712698321 1724421528
51271 the languages currently used in the document are listed,
51272 together with the (babel or polyglossia) options currently set.
51273 You can modify the options by clicking on the options list.
51274 Please refer to the documentation of the language package or language module for valid options.
51277 \begin_layout Standard
51278 Here is a list with the important encodings:
51281 \begin_layout Description
51282 ASCII the ASCII encoding,
51283 covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
51285 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
51287 which may result in a big file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
51288 -commands are needed.
51291 \begin_layout Description
51293 \begin_inset space ~
51297 \begin_inset space ~
51300 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
51303 \begin_layout Description
51305 \begin_inset space ~
51309 \begin_inset space ~
51312 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
51315 \begin_layout Description
51317 \begin_inset space ~
51320 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
51323 \begin_layout Description
51325 \begin_inset space ~
51329 \begin_inset space ~
51332 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian,
51333 Latvian and Lithuanian,
51334 the same as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
51337 \begin_layout Description
51339 \begin_inset space ~
51343 \begin_inset space ~
51346 8859-13) for Estonian,
51347 Latvian and Lithuanian,
51348 a superset of the ISO-8859-4 encoding
51351 \begin_layout Description
51353 \begin_inset space ~
51357 \begin_inset space ~
51360 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian,
51361 Latvian and Lithuanian,
51362 a subset of the ISO-8859-13 encoding
51365 \begin_layout Description
51367 \begin_inset space ~
51371 \begin_inset space ~
51375 \begin_inset space ~
51378 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
51379 \begin_inset space ~
51385 \begin_layout Description
51387 \begin_inset space ~
51391 \begin_inset space ~
51395 \begin_inset space ~
51398 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian,
51405 Slovak and Slovenian
51408 \begin_layout Description
51410 \begin_inset space ~
51414 \begin_inset space ~
51417 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese,
51418 used especially on UNIX OSes,
51419 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
51420 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
51421 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
51422 \begin_inset space ~
51426 \begin_inset space ~
51432 \begin_layout Description
51434 \begin_inset space ~
51438 \begin_inset space ~
51441 (GBK) for simplified Chinese,
51442 is the same as the Windows code page CP 936 except for the Euro currency sign,
51443 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
51444 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
51445 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
51446 \begin_inset space ~
51450 \begin_inset space ~
51456 \begin_layout Description
51458 \begin_inset space ~
51462 \begin_inset space ~
51465 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
51468 \begin_layout Description
51470 \begin_inset space ~
51474 \begin_inset space ~
51477 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
51480 \begin_layout Description
51482 \begin_inset space ~
51486 \begin_inset space ~
51489 8859-5) covers Belorussian,
51492 Serbian and Ukrainian
51495 \begin_layout Description
51497 \begin_inset space ~
51500 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
51503 \begin_layout Description
51505 \begin_inset space ~
51508 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
51511 \begin_layout Description
51513 \begin_inset space ~
51517 \begin_inset space ~
51520 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
51523 \begin_layout Description
51525 \begin_inset space ~
51529 \begin_inset space ~
51535 \begin_layout Description
51537 \begin_inset space ~
51541 \begin_inset space ~
51544 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew,
51545 a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
51548 \begin_layout Description
51550 \begin_inset space ~
51554 \begin_inset space ~
51560 \begin_layout Description
51562 \begin_inset space ~
51566 \begin_inset space ~
51569 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
51570 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51576 \begin_inset Index idx
51581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51584 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51600 set the document language to
51605 \begin_layout Description
51607 \begin_inset space ~
51611 \begin_inset space ~
51614 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
51615 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51622 set the document language to
51625 \begin_inset space ~
51631 \begin_layout Description
51633 \begin_inset space ~
51637 \begin_inset space ~
51640 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
51641 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51647 \begin_inset Index idx
51652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51655 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51671 set the document language to
51676 \begin_layout Description
51678 \begin_inset space ~
51682 \begin_inset space ~
51685 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
51686 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51693 set the document language to
51698 \begin_layout Description
51700 \begin_inset space ~
51704 \begin_inset space ~
51707 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese,
51708 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51715 set the document language to
51720 \begin_layout Description
51722 \begin_inset space ~
51725 (EUC-KR) for Korean
51728 \begin_layout Description
51730 \begin_inset space ~
51734 \begin_inset space ~
51738 \begin_inset space ~
51741 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto,
51743 Maltese and Turkish
51746 \begin_layout Description
51748 \begin_inset space ~
51752 \begin_inset space ~
51756 \begin_inset space ~
51759 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian,
51768 Romanian and Slovenian,
51769 is designed to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
51772 \begin_layout Description
51774 \begin_inset space ~
51778 \begin_inset space ~
51784 \begin_layout Description
51786 \begin_inset space ~
51790 \begin_inset space ~
51793 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish,
51794 is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
51797 \begin_layout Description
51799 \begin_inset space ~
51803 \begin_inset space ~
51806 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51812 \begin_inset Index idx
51817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51820 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51834 (for the languages Chinese,
51835 Japanese and Korean).
51836 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
51837 with the default encoding (
51839 Unicode (utf8) [default]
51845 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
51846 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
51849 \begin_layout Description
51851 \begin_inset space ~
51859 \begin_inset space ~
51862 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
51869 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
51873 which use Unicode directly,
51874 without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51881 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
51882 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
51884 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
51887 \begin_layout Description
51889 \begin_inset space ~
51893 \begin_inset space ~
51896 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51902 \begin_inset Index idx
51907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51910 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51926 Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
51927 This used to be more comprehensive than
51930 \begin_inset space ~
51936 but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
51939 \begin_layout Description
51941 \begin_inset space ~
51944 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51950 \begin_inset Index idx
51955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51958 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51973 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
51974 with the default encoding (
51976 Unicode (utf8) [default]
51982 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
51983 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
51986 \begin_layout Description
51988 \begin_inset space ~
51992 \begin_inset space ~
51996 \begin_inset space ~
51999 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
52000 \begin_inset space ~
52006 \begin_layout Description
52008 \begin_inset space ~
52012 \begin_inset space ~
52016 \begin_inset space ~
52019 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian,
52034 Spanish and Swedish;
52035 better use the ISO-8859-15 encoding instead
52038 \begin_layout Description
52040 \begin_inset space ~
52044 \begin_inset space ~
52048 \begin_inset space ~
52051 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding,
52052 but with the Euro currency sign,
52053 the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
52056 \begin_layout Section
52058 \begin_inset Index idx
52063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52065 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52080 \begin_inset Index idx
52085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52087 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52102 \begin_inset Index idx
52107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52109 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52124 \begin_inset Index idx
52129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52131 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52148 \begin_layout Standard
52149 Here you can alter the font color for the
52158 \begin_inset space ~
52164 light grey)for the background color for the
52172 \begin_inset space ~
52183 sets the color back to the default.
52186 \begin_layout Standard
52187 Clicking any button showing
52195 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
52196 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them later more quickly.
52199 \begin_layout Standard
52204 \begin_inset space ~
52209 font color and use the option
52212 \begin_inset space ~
52217 in the document settings under
52220 \begin_inset space ~
52226 you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
52227 \begin_inset space ~
52231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52233 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
52241 \begin_layout Standard
52242 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
52248 \begin_layout Standard
52252 \begin_inset space ~
52261 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as \SpecialChar TeX
52263 \begin_inset space ~
52266 Code after a forced page break:
52269 \begin_layout Itemize
52270 For the page color:
52271 \begin_inset Newline newline
52278 pagecolor{color name}
52281 \begin_layout Itemize
52282 For the text color:
52283 \begin_inset Newline newline
52293 \begin_layout Standard
52294 You are restricted to one of
52336 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
52343 \begin_inset space ~
52349 \begin_inset Newline newline
52352 If you have changed a text or background color,
52353 you can use the following names to refer to them:
52356 \begin_layout Itemize
52362 \begin_inset Newline newline
52367 page_backgroundcolor
52370 \begin_layout Itemize
52374 \begin_inset space ~
52380 \begin_inset Newline newline
52388 \begin_layout Itemize
52392 \begin_inset space ~
52398 \begin_inset Newline newline
52406 \begin_layout Itemize
52410 \begin_inset space ~
52416 \begin_inset Newline newline
52424 \begin_layout Standard
52425 To see how to define and use custom colors,
52429 \begin_inset space ~
52437 \begin_inset space ~
52445 \begin_layout Section
52449 \begin_layout Standard
52450 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
52451 \begin_inset space ~
52455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52457 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
52466 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar,
52467 you can set here whether changes are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
52470 \begin_layout Standard
52472 you can advise \SpecialChar LyX
52473 to place a change bar in the margin of the output.
52474 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
52477 \begin_layout Section
52481 \begin_layout Standard
52482 Here you can adjust the
52486 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
52490 as described in section
52491 \begin_inset space ~
52495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52497 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
52505 \begin_layout Standard
52506 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox at the bottom.
52507 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of this package can be used as well.
52508 The most common one are:
52511 \begin_layout Description
52512 right Line numbers to the right margin
52515 \begin_layout Description
52516 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages,
52520 \begin_layout Description
52521 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
52524 \begin_layout Description
52525 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
52528 \begin_layout Description
52529 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
52532 \begin_layout Description
52534 \begin_inset space ~
52537 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
52540 \begin_layout Section
52544 \begin_layout Standard
52545 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52551 \begin_inset Index idx
52556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52559 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52579 \begin_inset Index idx
52584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52587 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52606 \begin_inset Index idx
52611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52614 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52629 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52633 Sectioned bibliography
52635 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52641 \begin_inset Index idx
52646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52649 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52669 you can select the style files and specify further options.
52671 you can select a document-specific
52675 for the generation of the bibliography.
52676 For a further description of these possibilities see section
52677 \begin_inset space ~
52681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52683 reference "sec:Bibliography"
52691 \begin_layout Section
52693 \change_inserted -712698321 1724253284
52699 \begin_layout Standard
52700 Here you can define the
52704 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see section
52705 \begin_inset space ~
52709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52711 reference "sec:Index"
52717 \change_inserted -712698321 1724303218
52721 \begin_layout Section
52723 \change_inserted -712698321 1724303226
52727 \begin_layout Standard
52729 \change_inserted -712698321 1724303279
52730 Here you can select a nomenclature style and select among some options that determine the output of the nomenclature list (see section
52731 \begin_inset space ~
52735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52737 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
52750 \begin_layout Section
52754 \begin_layout Standard
52755 The PDF properties are explained in section
52756 \begin_inset space ~
52760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52762 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
52770 \begin_layout Section
52774 \begin_layout Standard
52775 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
52776 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52782 \begin_inset Index idx
52787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52790 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52810 \begin_inset Index idx
52815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52818 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52838 \begin_inset Index idx
52843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52846 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52866 \begin_inset Index idx
52871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52874 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52894 \begin_inset Index idx
52899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52902 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52922 \begin_inset Index idx
52927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52930 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52950 \begin_inset Index idx
52955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52958 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52978 \begin_inset Index idx
52983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52986 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53006 \begin_inset Index idx
53011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53014 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53033 \begin_inset Index idx
53038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53041 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53056 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
53059 \begin_layout Description
53060 amsmath is needed for many constructs,
53061 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
53062 -errors in formulas,
53063 ensure that you have this enabled.
53066 \begin_layout Description
53067 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek letters,
53068 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
53069 -errors in formulas,
53070 ensure that you have this enabled.
53073 \begin_layout Description
53074 cancel is used for canceled formulas,
53078 \begin_inset space ~
53090 \begin_layout Description
53091 esint is used for special integral characters,
53095 \begin_inset space ~
53107 \begin_layout Description
53108 mathdots is used for special ellipses,
53120 \begin_layout Description
53121 mathtools is used for the math commands
53162 and labeled arrows,
53163 see the corresponding sections in the
53170 \begin_layout Description
53171 mhchem is used for chemical equations,
53174 Chemical Symbols and Equations
53183 \begin_layout Description
53184 stackrel is used for the math command
53202 \begin_layout Description
53203 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
53206 \begin_layout Description
53207 undertilde is used for the math command
53216 Accents for one Character
53225 \begin_layout Section
53229 \begin_layout Standard
53230 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
53233 \begin_layout Standard
53234 Details are described in the section
53237 \begin_inset space ~
53245 \begin_inset space ~
53253 \begin_layout Section
53257 \begin_layout Standard
53258 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
53260 Program Code Listings
53265 \begin_inset space ~
53273 \begin_layout Section
53277 \begin_layout Standard
53278 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
53287 set to be used and set the
53292 The itemize environment is described in section
53293 \begin_inset space ~
53297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53299 reference "sec:Itemize"
53307 \begin_layout Standard
53308 You can furthermore specify a
53311 \begin_inset space ~
53316 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53317 command of the desired character.
53318 For example to use the € sign,
53319 you have to insert the command
53326 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
53328 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53332 \begin_inset space \space{}
53336 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
53346 To find the command for a math symbol,
53347 create a formula and hover the mouse over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
53350 \begin_layout Standard
53351 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
53354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53360 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
53361 -packages in the preamble (menu
53363 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53364 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
53367 \begin_inset space ~
53373 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
53377 usepackage{textcomp}
53380 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
53384 usepackage{amssymb}
53394 \begin_layout Section
53398 \begin_layout Standard
53399 Branches are described in section
53400 \begin_inset space ~
53404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53406 reference "sec:Branches"
53414 \begin_layout Section
53416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53418 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
53425 \begin_layout Standard
53426 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
53429 \begin_layout Description
53431 \begin_inset space ~
53436 Save transient properties
53438 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that are specific to the user are saved with the document.
53439 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
53443 \begin_layout Itemize
53444 the activation of change tracking
53447 \begin_layout Itemize
53448 the output of tracked changes
53451 \begin_layout Itemize
53452 the recording of the document directory path.
53455 \begin_layout Standard
53456 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts)
53460 \begin_layout Description
53462 \begin_inset space ~
53466 \begin_inset space ~
53470 The format that is used when you enter
53471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53492 View Master Document
53493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53500 Update Master Document
53501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53508 menu or the toolbar.
53509 The default is set in
53511 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
53512 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
53514 \begin_inset space ~
53517 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
53522 \begin_inset space ~
53526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53528 reference "sec:File-Formats"
53536 \begin_layout Description
53538 \begin_inset space ~
53542 \begin_inset space ~
53545 Options offers settings for the
53553 \begin_layout Itemize
53556 Synchronize with Output
53561 \begin_inset space ~
53566 and allows to customize the macro used in this process (for a detailed description see section
53568 Reverse DVI/PDF search
53573 \begin_inset space ~
53581 \begin_layout Itemize
53584 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
53586 determines whether so-called
53587 \begin_inset Quotes els
53591 \begin_inset Quotes ers
53595 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
53596 \begin_inset Quotes els
53600 \begin_inset Quotes ers
53603 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
53604 (such as sections or captions),
53605 even if the corresponding insets are placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
53607 This setting is on by default,
53608 since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
53610 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic macros,
53611 you can uncheck this.
53612 If you don't know what we are talking about here,
53614 just leave it checked.
53618 \begin_layout Description
53620 \begin_inset space ~
53624 \begin_inset space ~
53627 Options offers settings for the export format
53635 \begin_inset space ~
53640 will assure that the output follows exactly version
53641 \begin_inset space ~
53644 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
53648 \begin_inset space ~
53653 settings are described in detail in section
53655 Math Output in XHTML
53660 \begin_inset space ~
53667 \change_deleted -712698321 1723968417
53671 \begin_inset space ~
53675 \begin_inset space ~
53680 is used for the size of equations in the output.
53685 \begin_layout Description
53687 \begin_inset space ~
53691 \begin_inset space ~
53694 Options offers settings for the export format
53697 The details for the options are described in the chapter
53703 Additional Features
53708 \begin_layout Description
53710 \change_inserted -712698321 1723968656
53714 \begin_inset space ~
53718 \begin_inset space ~
53722 \begin_inset space ~
53727 is the scaling factor used for images that are generated to represent some \SpecialChar LaTeX
53729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53734 linguistics structure trees) in non-\SpecialChar LaTeX
53736 DocBook) graphically
53740 \change_inserted -712698321 1723968904
53741 The factor multiplies with 72
53742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53746 The higher the value,
53748 the better the image quality (and the bigger the file size).
53753 \begin_layout Description
53755 \begin_inset space ~
53759 \begin_inset space ~
53763 \begin_inset space ~
53766 programs If this is switched on,
53772 option which is needed with some packages.
53773 Note that this comes with security risks,
53774 so please use this only when really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
53777 \begin_layout Section
53785 \begin_layout Standard
53786 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
53787 -packages or to define \SpecialChar LaTeX
53789 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
53791 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are doing.
53794 \begin_layout Standard
53795 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53796 -syntax is given in section
53797 \begin_inset space ~
53801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53803 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
53811 \begin_layout Chapter
53817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53819 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
53824 \begin_inset Index idx
53829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53838 \begin_layout Standard
53839 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
53841 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
53845 It has the following submenus.
53848 \begin_layout Section
53852 \begin_layout Subsection
53856 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53857 User Interface File
53858 \begin_inset Index idx
53863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53865 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53880 \begin_inset Index idx
53885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53887 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53904 \begin_layout Standard
53905 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user interface (ui) file.
53906 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
53914 \begin_layout Description
53919 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
53922 \begin_layout Description
53929 the menu entries in popup context menus
53932 \begin_layout Description
53937 specifies the toolbar buttons
53940 \begin_layout Standard
53941 To create your own menu and toolbar layout,
53942 start with a copy of these files and edit the entries.
53945 \begin_layout Standard
53946 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward:
53960 entries must be finished with an explicit
53990 and in the case of the
53991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54003 The syntax for the entries is:
54006 \begin_layout Standard
54007 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
54013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54036 \begin_layout Standard
54038 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
54041 All the \SpecialChar LyX
54042 -functions are listed in the menu
54044 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
54046 \begin_inset space ~
54054 \begin_layout Standard
54055 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
54061 \begin_layout Standard
54063 assuming you use the menu
54065 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
54068 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks,
54069 you can add the line
54072 \begin_layout Standard
54073 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
54079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54097 \begin_layout Standard
54099 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
54103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54114 to have the sixth bookmark.
54117 \begin_layout Standard
54121 \begin_inset space ~
54126 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
54127 's toolbar buttons.
54128 The currently available icon sets are compared in
54129 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54132 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
54140 \begin_layout Standard
54144 \begin_inset space ~
54148 \begin_inset space ~
54153 allows you to change the look and feel of \SpecialChar LyX
54154 's user interface control elements.
54155 There may be different choices available on different operating systems.
54156 On certain operating systems some styles may support dark mode while others don't.
54157 In order to use dark mode in \SpecialChar LyX
54158 you may first need to enable it in your system's settings.
54161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
54165 \begin_layout Standard
54168 Enable tool tips in main work area
54170 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries or footnotes.
54173 \begin_layout Subsubsection
54177 \begin_layout Standard
54182 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
54183 should display in the menu
54185 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
54187 \begin_inset space ~
54195 \begin_layout Subsubsection
54199 \begin_layout Standard
54200 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
54205 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
54206 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen;
54207 the text then appears centered.
54210 \begin_layout Subsection
54214 \begin_layout Subsubsection
54218 \begin_layout Standard
54221 Restore window layouts and geometries
54224 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in the last \SpecialChar LyX
54228 \begin_layout Standard
54231 Restore cursor positions
54233 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of the last session.
54236 \begin_layout Standard
54239 Load opened files from last session
54241 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
54245 \begin_layout Standard
54248 Clear all session information
54250 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
54251 sessions (cursor positions,
54252 names of last opened documents,
54256 \begin_layout Subsubsection
54258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54260 name "subsec:Backup documents"
54265 \begin_inset Index idx
54270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54272 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54289 \begin_layout Standard
54292 Backup original documents when saving
54294 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was saved the last time.
54295 It is stored in the
54298 \begin_inset space ~
54304 \begin_inset space ~
54308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54310 reference "sec:Paths"
54315 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
54318 \begin_inset space ~
54324 The backup file has the file extension
54328 and the same name than the original file.
54332 \begin_inset space ~
54338 the file has the full path in its file name,
54340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54355 !MyDir!MySubDir!Filename.lyx~
54360 \begin_layout Standard
54363 Make auto-save snapshots every X minutes
54366 LyX furthermore automatically saves snapshots of the current document (including unsaved changes) in the specified interval if there are unsaved changes.
54367 These files which are stored as
54371 in the document's directory are overwritten on each auto-save cycle and deleted when the document is closed normally.
54372 Should \SpecialChar LyX
54373 crash with unsaved changes and the restoration from the emergency file fail,
54374 this file can be used as a resort.
54377 \begin_layout Standard
54378 Please read section
54379 \begin_inset space ~
54383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54385 reference "sec:Safety-Nets"
54389 for more details on \SpecialChar LyX
54390 's diverse backup and safety mechanisms.
54393 \begin_layout Standard
54396 Save documents compressed by default
54398 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
54399 \begin_inset space ~
54403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54405 reference "subsec:Compressed"
54411 This applies to newly created documents only.
54412 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
54415 \begin_layout Standard
54418 Save the document directory path
54420 stores the path of the document in the \SpecialChar LyX
54422 This is particularly handy if you have included files (such as graphics or child documents) which are referred to with relative paths.
54423 The option then allows moving the document elsewhere and still finding these included files if they are still in their original directories.
54426 \begin_layout Subsubsection
54427 Windows & work area
54430 \begin_layout Standard
54433 Open documents in tabs
54436 every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
54440 \begin_layout Standard
54445 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
54450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54452 \begin_inset space ~
54456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54458 reference "sec:Paths"
54463 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
54472 documents will be opened in the same running instance of \SpecialChar LyX
54474 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
54475 instance is created for each file.
54478 \begin_layout Standard
54481 Single close-tab button
54484 there will only be one close button (
54494 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
54495 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
54496 Regardless of this option,
54497 one can always close a tab by middle-clicking it in the tab bar.
54500 \begin_layout Standard
54501 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
54504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54510 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
54511 before the change takes effect.
54519 \begin_layout Standard
54524 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view is closed.
54525 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
54527 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
54531 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several instances of \SpecialChar LyX
54532 and only want to close the view in once instance.
54535 \begin_layout Subsection
54537 \begin_inset Index idx
54542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54544 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54559 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54561 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
54568 \begin_layout Standard
54569 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
54573 \begin_layout Standard
54574 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
54577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54583 This section only deals with the fonts
54587 the \SpecialChar LyX
54589 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts,
54590 and set in the menu
54592 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54593 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
54604 \begin_layout Standard
54624 (depends on the system) as its
54627 \begin_inset space ~
54643 \begin_layout Standard
54644 You can change the font size with the
54651 \begin_layout Standard
54656 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
54658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54661 points have the size of 1
54662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54667 \begin_inset space ~
54671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54673 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
54679 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
54680 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54684 The sizes are explained in detail in section
54685 \begin_inset space ~
54689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54691 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
54699 \begin_layout Subsection
54701 \begin_inset Index idx
54706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54708 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54724 \begin_inset Index idx
54729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54731 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54748 \begin_layout Standard
54749 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
54750 by choosing an item in the list and selecting the
54757 \begin_layout Standard
54758 By checking the option
54762 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
54770 \begin_inset space ~
54774 \begin_inset space ~
54779 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
54782 \begin_layout Subsection
54784 \begin_inset Index idx
54789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54791 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54808 \begin_layout Standard
54809 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
54813 \begin_layout Standard
54818 enables previewing snippets of your document.
54819 This feature is described in section
54820 \begin_inset space ~
54824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54826 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
54834 \begin_layout Standard
54835 Checking the option
54838 \begin_inset space ~
54842 \begin_inset space ~
54846 \begin_inset space ~
54851 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
54854 \begin_layout Section
54856 \begin_inset Index idx
54861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54863 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54880 \begin_layout Subsection
54884 \begin_layout Subsubsection
54888 \begin_layout Standard
54891 Cursor follows scrollbar
54893 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when scrolling.
54896 \begin_layout Standard
54897 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
54898 If you set the value to zero,
54899 the thickness of the cursor scales relative to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
54902 \begin_layout Standard
54905 Scroll below end of document
54907 is self-explanatory.
54910 \begin_layout Standard
54911 In \SpecialChar LyX
54912 one can jump from word to word by pressing
54919 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
54921 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
54922 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
54925 \begin_layout Standard
54928 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
54930 is only relevant in documents that
54936 change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is (keeping
54944 markup) with this option selected.
54945 It the option is not selected,
54946 pasted text will be inserted without any markup (i.
54947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54952 \begin_inset Quotes els
54956 \begin_inset Quotes ers
54960 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
54961 dissolving from insets.
54972 \begin_inset Quotes els
54976 \begin_inset Quotes ers
54979 notwithstanding the state of this option.
54982 \begin_layout Standard
54985 Sort environments alphabetically
54987 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
54990 \begin_layout Standard
54993 Group environments by their category
54995 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
54998 \begin_layout Standard
55003 options determine the editing style for math macros,
55015 \begin_layout Standard
55018 Search drive for cited files
55020 allows \SpecialChar LyX
55021 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
55024 \begin_inset space ~
55028 \begin_inset space ~
55032 \begin_inset space ~
55036 \begin_inset space ~
55039 Content\SpecialChar ldots
55042 context menu on a citation.
55047 field determines the search pattern.
55049 \begin_inset space ~
55053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55055 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
55063 \begin_layout Subsection
55065 \begin_inset Index idx
55070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55077 \begin_inset Index idx
55082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55084 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55101 \begin_layout Standard
55106 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
55108 Several binding files are available,
55112 \begin_layout Description
55113 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
55116 \begin_layout Description
55117 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
55128 \begin_layout Description
55129 mac.bind a set of bindings for
55132 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
55140 \begin_layout Standard
55141 There are also binding files designed for special document classes,
55147 and binding files for special languages.
55148 The names of language binding files begin with a language code,
55150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
55154 \begin_inset space \space{}
55158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55166 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
55167 in a certain language,
55169 will try to use the appropriate binding file.
55172 \begin_layout Standard
55173 Some binding files,
55179 only have a limited scope.
55180 When looking at the end of the file
55185 you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
55188 \begin_layout Standard
55192 \begin_inset space ~
55196 \begin_inset space ~
55201 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function in the selected key binding file.
55204 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55206 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55208 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
55213 \begin_inset Index idx
55218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55220 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55237 \begin_layout Standard
55238 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
55239 functions and the bound shortcuts.
55240 To find functions easily,
55241 they are grouped by categories and the dialog provides the field
55243 Show key-bindings containing
55246 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
55247 Insert there for example as keyword
55248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55255 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different functions that contain
55256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55265 one function can have more than one shortcut.
55266 All \SpecialChar LyX
55267 functions are also listed in the file
55272 that you will find in the
55279 \begin_layout Standard
55281 to add the shortcut
55290 select the function and press the
55295 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
55296 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
55299 \begin_layout Standard
55300 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
55301 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
55302 Function definition with “
55304 command-alternatives
55306 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated list.
55308 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document part.
55311 \begin_layout Standard
55312 If you don't like a particular shortcut,
55316 \begin_layout Standard
55317 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with a text editor.
55318 The syntax of the entries is:
55321 \begin_layout Standard
55327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55346 \begin_layout Standard
55349 that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
55350 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
55351 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
55384 respectively) as well as to the other keys.
55385 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly in the definition of the key combination,
55386 but must use commands following the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for a model).
55387 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
55392 you needed to specify it as
55397 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings,
55398 you don't have to care for these specifics.
55400 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
55403 \begin_layout Subsection
55405 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55407 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
55412 \begin_inset Index idx
55417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55424 \begin_inset Index idx
55429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55431 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55448 \begin_layout Standard
55449 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
55450 For the case where this is not possible,
55452 provides keyboard maps.
55455 you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it is a Romanian one,
55459 \begin_inset space ~
55463 \begin_inset space ~
55468 and select the keyboard map file named
55475 \begin_layout Standard
55490 you can select the first and second with
55493 arg "keymap-primary"
55499 arg "keymap-secondary"
55502 respectively or toggle between them with
55505 arg "keymap-toggle"
55511 \begin_layout Standard
55512 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
55515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55521 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all systems.
55529 \begin_layout Standard
55530 You can also specify the mouse
55532 Wheel scrolling speed
55535 The standard value is 1.0;
55536 higher values speed up the scrolling,
55537 lower ones slow it down.
55540 Middle mouse button pasting
55542 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel) inserts the content of the clipboard.
55545 \begin_layout Standard
55553 \begin_inset space ~
55557 \begin_inset space ~
55563 you can select a key for zooming.
55564 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated,
55565 the text is zoomed.
55568 \begin_layout Subsection
55572 \begin_layout Standard
55573 Input completion is described in section
55574 \begin_inset space ~
55578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55580 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
55588 \begin_layout Section
55590 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55597 \begin_inset Index idx
55602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55609 \begin_inset Index idx
55614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55616 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55633 \begin_layout Standard
55634 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
55635 are normally determined during the installation.
55636 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
55639 \begin_layout Description
55641 \begin_inset space ~
55644 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
55645 's working directory.
55646 It is the default when you
55658 \begin_inset space ~
55666 \begin_layout Description
55668 \begin_inset space ~
55671 templates This directory contains the templates that are shown in
55673 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
55675 \begin_inset space ~
55679 \begin_inset space ~
55687 \begin_layout Description
55689 \begin_inset space ~
55692 files This directory contains the example files that are listed in
55694 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
55700 \begin_layout Description
55702 \begin_inset space ~
55706 \begin_inset Index idx
55711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55713 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55727 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
55728 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
55729 \begin_inset space ~
55733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55735 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
55745 will be used to save the backups.
55746 \begin_inset Newline newline
55749 Backup files have the ending
55750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55760 \begin_layout Description
55762 \begin_inset space ~
55765 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
55766 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
55768 \begin_inset Newline newline
55776 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
55782 You can edit this file with the program
55791 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
55792 in its preferences under
55795 \begin_inset space ~
55801 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation,
55806 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
55808 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position in your \SpecialChar LyX
55815 and \SpecialChar LyX
55816 need to be running the same time.
55817 \begin_inset Newline newline
55820 The pipe is also used for the
55826 \begin_inset space ~
55830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55832 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
55838 \begin_inset Newline newline
55841 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
55842 Server-Pipe on Windows,
55843 you must use this pipe name:
55844 \begin_inset Newline newline
55860 \begin_layout Description
55862 \begin_inset space ~
55865 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
55868 \begin_layout Description
55870 \begin_inset space ~
55873 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
55874 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
55877 \begin_layout Description
55879 \begin_inset space ~
55882 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
55887 You only need to specify it if you are using
55891 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
55892 For \SpecialChar LyX
55897 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying a directory.
55900 \begin_layout Description
55902 \begin_inset space ~
55905 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
55906 When \SpecialChar LyX
55907 needs to use an external program,
55908 it looks in this list to see where to find it on the system.
55909 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
55911 so you normally don't have to modify it.
55913 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
55917 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
55921 the path list will need to be set only if there are external programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
55924 \begin_layout Description
55926 \begin_inset space ~
55929 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
55930 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
55931 code or in the document preamble.
55932 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by a single dot '.').
55933 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
55934 If files are included,
55935 the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be scanned for the input files.
55936 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
55938 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths;
55939 otherwise compilation may fail for some documents.
55942 \begin_layout Section
55946 \begin_layout Standard
55947 Here you can insert your
55956 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking,
55957 as described in section
55958 \begin_inset space ~
55962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55964 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
55970 to mark changes you make as yours.
55973 \begin_layout Section
55975 \begin_inset Index idx
55980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55982 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55997 \begin_inset Index idx
56002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56004 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56021 \begin_layout Subsection
56023 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56025 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
56032 \begin_layout Description
56034 \begin_inset space ~
56038 \begin_inset space ~
56041 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
56043 You can find its actual translation status here:
56045 \begin_inset CommandInset href
56047 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
56055 \begin_layout Subsubsection
56056 LaTeX Language Support
56059 \begin_layout Description
56061 \begin_inset space ~
56064 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
56065 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
56066 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
56067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56083 The most widespread language package is
56088 \begin_inset Index idx
56093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56096 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56111 it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
56113 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
56114 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
56115 come with the alternative language package
56120 \begin_inset Index idx
56125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56128 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56142 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
56144 there are also specific language packages for languages not covered by
56149 The available selections are described in section
56150 \begin_inset space ~
56154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56156 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
56164 \begin_layout Description
56166 \begin_inset space ~
56169 start Here you customize the command that is used to switch to a different language.
56170 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
56174 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
56175 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands,
56178 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
56182 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
56190 which needs the start command
56205 selectlanguage{$$lang}
56212 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56219 this setting is ignored.
56222 \begin_layout Description
56224 \begin_inset space ~
56227 end Use this if the language switch set in
56231 needs to be explicitly ended,
56236 's alternative command
56240 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
56241 \SpecialChar allowbreak
56244 end{otherlanguage*}
56252 selectlanguage{$$lang}
56254 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the next
56258 selectlanguage{$$lang}
56266 this setting is ignored.
56269 \begin_layout Description
56271 \begin_inset space ~
56275 \begin_inset space ~
56278 globally If this option is set,
56279 the languages used in the document will be added to the document class options rather than the language package options.
56280 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
56282 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this way.
56285 \begin_layout Description
56287 \begin_inset space ~
56291 \begin_inset space ~
56295 \begin_inset space ~
56298 explicitly If this option is set,
56299 the language switch defined in
56302 \begin_inset space ~
56307 is output at the beginning of the document,
56308 thereby explicitly switching to the document language.
56309 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
56310 This might be needed if you use a non-default
56313 \begin_inset space ~
56318 or if a package resets the document language.
56320 the language that is active at document start is used (this usually should be the document language).
56323 \begin_layout Description
56325 \begin_inset space ~
56329 \begin_inset space ~
56333 \begin_inset space ~
56336 explicitly Counterpart to
56338 Set document language explicitly
56345 \begin_inset space ~
56350 is output at the end of the document.
56353 \begin_layout Subsubsection
56354 \paragraph_spacing single
56358 \begin_layout Description
56360 \begin_inset space ~
56364 \begin_inset space ~
56368 all text in a language different to the document language will be marked (by default with a blue underline).
56371 \begin_layout Description
56373 \begin_inset space ~
56377 \begin_inset space ~
56380 movement Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves when writing scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g.,
56387 \begin_layout Standard
56392 means that the cursor follows the logic of the text direction,
56393 and the arrows' direction relates to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
56395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56399 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say,
56400 Hebrew embedded in English),
56401 the cursor starts at the right (that is,
56406 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the left.
56407 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part;
56408 right arrow in this specific case always means:
56413 in text (even if this means:
56419 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left scripts,
56420 since the cursor then follows a coherent
56421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56431 \begin_layout Standard
56437 always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
56439 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
56440 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
56445 ) when coming from the left.
56446 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases,
56447 at the expense of the text logic.
56451 \begin_layout Subsubsection
56455 \begin_layout Description
56457 \begin_inset space ~
56461 \begin_inset space ~
56464 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal separator alignment).
56466 the appropriate character for the current language is selected (e.
56467 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56473 but you can also specify a specific (static) custom character here.
56476 \begin_layout Description
56478 \begin_inset space ~
56482 \begin_inset space ~
56485 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
56489 \begin_layout Subsection
56493 \begin_layout Standard
56494 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
56495 \begin_inset space ~
56499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56501 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
56509 \begin_layout Section
56513 \begin_layout Subsection
56515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56517 name "subsec:General-output"
56524 \begin_layout Description
56526 \begin_inset space ~
56529 search Commands that will be used for the menu
56531 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
56533 \begin_inset space ~
56539 For a detailed description see section
56541 Reverse DVI/PDF search
56546 \begin_inset space ~
56554 \begin_layout Description
56556 \begin_inset space ~
56559 Options Options for the program
56563 that is used for the export format
56569 \begin_inset space ~
56573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56575 reference "subsec:Export"
56581 Possible options are listed in the
56586 \begin_inset Newline newline
56590 \begin_inset Flex URL
56593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56595 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
56605 \begin_layout Description
56607 \begin_inset space ~
56611 \begin_inset space ~
56614 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using the menu
56616 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
56617 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
56619 \begin_inset space ~
56625 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
56628 \begin_layout Description
56630 \begin_inset space ~
56634 \begin_inset space ~
56637 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
56638 is allowed to overwrite on export.
56641 \begin_layout Subsection
56647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56649 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
56654 \begin_inset Index idx
56659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56661 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56679 \begin_layout Description
56681 \begin_inset space ~
56685 \begin_inset space ~
56689 \begin_inset space ~
56693 \begin_inset space ~
56696 options They only have an effect when the program
56700 is used as DVI-viewer,
56701 read its manual to find out more.
56704 \begin_layout Standard
56705 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
56706 But before you change something,
56707 it is strongly recommended to read the manuals of the applications.
56710 \begin_layout Description
56712 \begin_inset space ~
56715 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography,
56717 \begin_inset space ~
56721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56723 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
56731 \begin_layout Description
56733 \begin_inset space ~
56736 generation Settings for the generation of the index,
56738 \begin_inset space ~
56742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56744 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
56752 \begin_layout Description
56754 \begin_inset space ~
56757 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature,
56759 \begin_inset space ~
56763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56765 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
56773 \begin_layout Description
56779 \begin_inset space ~
56782 command Command for the program
56784 Check\SpecialChar TeX
56787 that is described in the section
56789 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
56794 Additional Features
56799 \begin_layout Standard
56800 There are additionally the following options:
56803 \begin_layout Description
56805 \begin_inset space ~
56809 \begin_inset space ~
56813 \begin_inset space ~
56817 \begin_inset space ~
56822 \begin_inset space ~
56825 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows,
56827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
56841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
56844 to separate folders.
56845 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
56847 \begin_inset Index idx
56852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56859 \begin_inset Index idx
56864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56866 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56883 \begin_layout Description
56885 \begin_inset space ~
56889 \begin_inset space ~
56893 \begin_inset space ~
56897 \begin_inset space ~
56901 \begin_inset space ~
56905 \begin_inset space ~
56908 changes Removes all manually set
56914 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
56915 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
56917 \begin_inset space ~
56922 dialog when changing the document class.
56925 \begin_layout Section
56927 \begin_inset space ~
56931 \begin_inset Index idx
56936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56945 \begin_layout Subsection
56947 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56949 name "subsec:Converters"
56954 \begin_inset Index idx
56959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56968 \begin_layout Standard
56969 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material from one format to another.
56970 You can modify converters or create new ones.
56971 To modify a converter,
56973 change the entry of the
56980 \begin_inset space ~
56985 field and press the
56990 To create a new converter,
56991 select an existing one,
56992 select a different format in the
56995 \begin_inset space ~
57005 field and press the
57012 \begin_layout Standard
57015 Converter File Cache
57022 conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
57024 Maximum Age (in days
57027 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen a document;
57028 the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
57031 \begin_layout Standard
57032 More about converters,
57033 like the flags that can be used in the converter definition,
57034 is described in the section
57045 \begin_layout Subsection
57047 \begin_inset CommandInset label
57049 name "sec:File-Formats"
57054 \begin_inset Index idx
57059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57066 \begin_inset Index idx
57071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57080 \begin_layout Standard
57081 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
57091 programs that should be used for certain formats.
57094 \begin_layout Standard
57095 You can also define the
57097 Default output format
57099 that is used when you use
57103 View Master Document
57107 Update Master Document
57113 menu or the toolbar.
57116 \begin_layout Standard
57117 More about formats and their options is described in the section
57128 \begin_layout Standard
57129 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
57130 's temporary directory,
57131 it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
57132 This is done by specifying a
57137 More about this is described in the section
57148 \begin_layout Chapter
57149 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
57151 \begin_inset Index idx
57156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57163 \begin_inset CommandInset label
57165 name "chap:Units-available-in"
57172 \begin_layout Standard
57174 \begin_inset space ~
57178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57180 reference "tab:Units"
57185 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
57186 and used in this documentation.
57189 \begin_layout Standard
57190 \begin_inset Float table
57197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57198 \begin_inset Caption Standard
57200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57201 \begin_inset CommandInset label
57215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57216 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
57222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57224 \begin_inset Tabular
57225 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
57226 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
57227 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
57228 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
57229 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
57231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
57252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57279 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
57290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57312 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
57327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
57356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57378 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57382 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
57386 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
57397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
57430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
57463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
57492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
57521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57547 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
57558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57580 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57584 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
57595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57617 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
57632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57653 scaled point (65536
57654 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
57669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
57698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57721 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
57726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
57729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
57760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
57791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
57822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57845 % of original image width
57850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
57853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
57882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
57904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
57913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57934 \begin_layout Standard
57935 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
57938 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
57945 \begin_layout Bibliography
57946 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57947 LatexCommand bibitem
57954 The \SpecialChar LyX
57957 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57960 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
57966 \begin_inset Newline newline
57970 \begin_inset Flex URL
57973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57975 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
57983 \begin_layout Bibliography
57984 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57985 LatexCommand bibitem
57986 key "latexcompanion"
57991 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
57994 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
57995 Companion Second Edition.
58002 \begin_layout Bibliography
58003 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58004 LatexCommand bibitem
58010 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
58014 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
58022 \begin_layout Bibliography
58023 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58024 LatexCommand bibitem
58035 A Document Preparation System.
58043 \begin_layout Bibliography
58044 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58045 LatexCommand bibitem
58055 The \SpecialChar TeX
58063 \begin_layout Bibliography
58064 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58065 LatexCommand bibitem
58071 The \SpecialChar TeX
58073 \begin_inset Newline newline
58077 \begin_inset Flex URL
58080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58082 https://ctan.org/topic
58090 \begin_layout Bibliography
58091 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58092 LatexCommand bibitem
58098 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
58100 \begin_inset Newline newline
58104 \begin_inset Flex URL
58107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58109 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
58117 \begin_layout Bibliography
58118 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58119 LatexCommand bibitem
58126 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58128 name "Documentation"
58129 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
58136 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
58140 \begin_inset Newline newline
58144 \begin_inset Flex URL
58147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58149 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
58157 \begin_layout Bibliography
58158 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58159 LatexCommand bibitem
58166 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58168 name "Documentation"
58169 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
58174 how to use the program
58176 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
58180 \begin_inset Newline newline
58184 \begin_inset Flex URL
58187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58189 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
58197 \begin_layout Bibliography
58198 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58199 LatexCommand bibitem
58206 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58208 name "Documentation"
58209 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
58214 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
58220 \begin_inset Index idx
58225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58228 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58243 \begin_inset Newline newline
58247 \begin_inset Flex URL
58250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58252 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
58260 \begin_layout Bibliography
58261 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58262 LatexCommand bibitem
58269 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58271 name "Documentation"
58272 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
58277 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
58283 \begin_inset Index idx
58288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58291 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58306 \begin_inset Newline newline
58310 \begin_inset Flex URL
58313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58315 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
58323 \begin_layout Bibliography
58324 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58325 LatexCommand bibitem
58332 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58334 name "Documentation"
58335 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
58345 \begin_inset Newline newline
58349 \begin_inset Flex URL
58352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58354 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
58362 \begin_layout Bibliography
58363 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58364 LatexCommand bibitem
58365 key "makeindex-man"
58371 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58374 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
58384 \begin_inset Newline newline
58388 \begin_inset Flex URL
58391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58393 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
58401 \begin_layout Bibliography
58402 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58403 LatexCommand bibitem
58410 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58412 name "Documentation"
58413 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf"
58423 \begin_inset Newline newline
58427 \begin_inset Flex URL
58430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58432 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf
58440 \begin_layout Bibliography
58441 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58442 LatexCommand bibitem
58449 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58451 name "Documentation"
58452 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
58462 \begin_inset Newline newline
58466 \begin_inset Flex URL
58469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58471 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
58479 \begin_layout Bibliography
58480 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58481 LatexCommand bibitem
58488 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58490 name "Documentation"
58491 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
58496 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
58498 \begin_inset Newline newline
58502 \begin_inset Flex URL
58505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58507 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
58515 \begin_layout Bibliography
58516 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58517 LatexCommand bibitem
58524 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58526 name "Documentation"
58527 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
58532 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
58538 \begin_inset Index idx
58543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58546 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58561 \begin_inset Newline newline
58565 \begin_inset Flex URL
58568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58570 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
58578 \begin_layout Bibliography
58579 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58580 LatexCommand bibitem
58587 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58589 name "Documentation"
58590 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
58595 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
58601 \begin_inset Index idx
58606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58609 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58624 \begin_inset Newline newline
58628 \begin_inset Flex URL
58631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58633 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
58641 \begin_layout Bibliography
58642 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58643 LatexCommand bibitem
58650 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58652 name "Documentation"
58653 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
58658 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
58664 \begin_inset Index idx
58669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58672 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58687 \begin_inset Newline newline
58691 \begin_inset Flex URL
58694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58696 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
58704 \begin_layout Bibliography
58705 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58706 LatexCommand bibitem
58713 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58715 name "Documentation"
58716 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
58721 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
58727 \begin_inset Index idx
58732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58735 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58750 \begin_inset Newline newline
58754 \begin_inset Flex URL
58757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58759 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
58767 \begin_layout Bibliography
58768 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58769 LatexCommand bibitem
58776 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58778 name "Documentation"
58779 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
58784 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
58790 \begin_inset Index idx
58795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58798 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58813 \begin_inset Newline newline
58817 \begin_inset Flex URL
58820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58822 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
58830 \begin_layout Bibliography
58831 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58832 LatexCommand bibitem
58839 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58841 name "Documentation"
58842 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
58847 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
58853 \begin_inset Index idx
58858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58861 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58876 \begin_inset Newline newline
58880 \begin_inset Flex URL
58883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58885 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
58893 \begin_layout Bibliography
58894 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58895 LatexCommand bibitem
58902 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58904 name "Documentation"
58905 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
58910 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
58916 \begin_inset Index idx
58921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58924 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58939 \begin_inset Newline newline
58943 \begin_inset Flex URL
58946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58948 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
58956 \begin_layout Bibliography
58957 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58958 LatexCommand bibitem
58965 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58967 name "Documentation"
58968 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
58973 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
58979 \begin_inset Index idx
58984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58987 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59002 \begin_inset Newline newline
59006 \begin_inset Flex URL
59009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59011 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
59019 \begin_layout Bibliography
59020 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59021 LatexCommand bibitem
59028 \begin_inset CommandInset href
59031 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
59036 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
59038 \begin_inset Newline newline
59042 \begin_inset Flex URL
59045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59047 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
59055 \begin_layout Bibliography
59056 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59057 LatexCommand bibitem
59064 \begin_inset CommandInset href
59067 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
59072 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
59074 \begin_inset Newline newline
59078 \begin_inset Flex URL
59081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59083 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
59091 \begin_layout Bibliography
59092 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59093 LatexCommand bibitem
59100 \begin_inset CommandInset href
59103 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
59108 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
59109 for Cyrillic languages:
59110 \begin_inset Newline newline
59114 \begin_inset Flex URL
59117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59119 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
59127 \begin_layout Bibliography
59128 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59129 LatexCommand bibitem
59136 \begin_inset CommandInset href
59139 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
59144 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
59146 \begin_inset Newline newline
59150 \begin_inset Flex URL
59153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59155 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
59163 \begin_layout Bibliography
59164 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59165 LatexCommand bibitem
59172 \begin_inset CommandInset href
59175 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
59180 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
59182 \begin_inset Newline newline
59186 \begin_inset Flex URL
59189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59191 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
59199 \begin_layout Bibliography
59200 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
59201 LatexCommand bibitem
59208 \begin_inset CommandInset href
59211 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
59216 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
59218 \begin_inset Newline newline
59222 \begin_inset Flex URL
59225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59227 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
59235 \begin_layout Standard
59236 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
59243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59271 \begin_inset Note Note
59274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59281 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
59282 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following bibliography is the second one:
59290 \begin_layout Standard
59291 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
59292 LatexCommand bibtex
59293 btprint "btPrintCited"
59294 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
59303 \begin_layout Standard
59304 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
59308 \begin_layout Standard
59312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59318 pagedeclaration}[1]{
59321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59328 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
59336 \begin_inset Note Note
59339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59340 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink,
59342 \begin_inset space ~
59346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59348 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
59361 \begin_layout Standard
59362 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
59363 LatexCommand printnomenclature
59369 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
59370 LatexCommand printindex